Delta Ia-Asd B2 Um en 20141217

Version: V2.
1
DELTA_IA-ASDA_B2_UM_EN_20141218
Preface
Thank you for purchasing ASDA-B2. This user manual provides the related information of
ECMA series servo motors. This manual includes:
Installation and inspection of servo drive and servo motor

The configuration of servo drive
Procedures of trial run
Control functions and adjustment methods of servo drives
Parameter
Communication protocol
Inspection and maintenance
Troubleshooting
This manual addresses personnel with the following qualifications:

Servo system designers
Installation or wiring personnel
Trial and tuning personnel
Maintenance and inspection personnel
Before using the product, please read through this manual carefully in order to ensure the
correct use of the product. In addition, please place this manual safely for quick reference
whenever is needed. Please follow the rules below if you have not finished reading this
manual yet.
No water, corrosive gas and inflammable gas are allowed in installation
environment.
Three-phase power is prohibited to connect to U, V and W connector when
wiring. It is possible to damage the servo drive.
Ensure that the motor and drive are correctly connected to a ground. The
grounding method must comply with the electrical standard of the country
(Please refer to NFPA 70: National Electrical Code, 2005 Ed.).
Do not disconnect the servo drive, motor or change the wiring when
connecting to the power.
Be ensured that the emergency stop can be activated anytime before
connecting to the power and operation.
Revision December 2014 i

Preface ASDA-B2
Do not touch the heat sink to avoid scald before connecting to the power
and operation.
If you have any enquiry, please contact the distributors or DELTA customer service center.
ii Revision December 2014

ASDA-B2 Preface
Safety Precautions
ASDA-B2 series is the high resolution and open type servo drive. It should be installed in a
shielded control box during operation. This servo drive uses precise feedback control and
the digital signal processor with high-speed calculation function to control the current
output which generated by IGBT so as to operate three-phase permanent magnet
synchronous motors (PMSM) and to achieve precise positioning.
ASDA-B2 is applicable on industrial application and is suggested to be installed in the

panel-board of the user manual. (Servo drives, wire rod and motors all should be installed
in the environment which complies with the minimum requirement of UL Level 1 or NEMA
250 Type 1.)
Pay special attention to the following safety precautions anytime during inspection,
installation, wiring, operation and examination.
The symbol of danger, warning and stop represent:
It indicates the potential hazards. It is possible to cause severe injury or fatal

harm if not follow the instructions.
It indicates the potential hazards. It is possible to cause minor injury or lead to

serious damage of the product or even malfunction if not follow the instructions.
It indicates the absolute prohibited activity. It is possible to damage the product or

cannot be used due to malfunction if not follow the instructions.
Inspection
Please follow the instruction when using servo drive and servo motor, or it is
possible to cause fire or malfunction.
Installation
It is prohibited to expose the product with the environment which containing
water, corrosive gas, inflammable gas, etc. Or it is possible to cause electric
shock or fire.
Wiring
Please connect the ground terminal to class-3 ground system (under 100
); poor grounding may result in electric shock or fire.
Do not connect the three-phase source to the motor output terminal U, V
and W. Or it is possible to cause personnel injury or fire.
Please tighten the screws of the power and motor output terminal. Or it is
possible to cause fire.
Revision December 2014 iii

Preface ASDA-B2
Operation
Before the operation, please change the parameter setting value according to
the needs. If it is not adjusted to the correct setting value, it is possible to lead
to malfunction of the machine or the operation might out of control.
Before the machine starts to operate, please be ensured the emergency stop
can be activated anytime.
During the operation, it is prohibited to touch any rotating motor parts. Or it is

possible to cause personnel injury.
In order to prevent any accident, please separate the couplings and belts of
the machine and isolate them. Then conduct the initial trial run.
If users fail to operate the machine properly after the servo motor connects to
the equipment, it would cause the damage of the equipment and lead to the
personnel injury.
In order to prevent the danger, it is strongly recommended to check if the
motor can operate normally without load first. Then, operate the motor with
load.
Do not touch the heat sink of the servo drive. Or it is possible to cause scald
due to the high temperature.
Maintenance and Inspection
It is prohibited to touch the internal parts of the servo drive and servo motor.
Or it is possible to cause electric shock.
It is prohibited to disassemble the panel of the servo drive when turning on
the power. Or it is possible to cause electric shock.
Do not touch the ground terminal within 10 minutes after turning off the
power. Or the residual voltage may cause electric shock.
Do not disassemble the motor. Or it is possible to cause electric shock or
personnel injury.
Do not change the wiring when the power is on. Or it is possible to cause
electric shock or personnel injury.
Only the qualified electrical and electronics professionals can install, wire
and maintain the servo drive and servo motor.
Main Circuit Wiring
Do not put the power cable and the encoder cable in the same channel and
bond them together. Please separate the power cable and the encoder
cable for at least 30 centimeters (= 11.8 inches) when wiring.
Please use stranded wires and multi-core shielded-pair wires for the
encoder cables and encoder feedback cables. The maximum length of
command input cable is 3 meters (= 9.84 feet) and the maximum length of
feedback cable is 20 meters (= 65.62 feet).
The high voltage might remain in the servo motor even when the power is
off. Do not touch the power terminal temporally (at least 10 minutes). Please
conduct the inspection not until the indicator light, CHARGE is off.
iv Revision December 2014

ASDA-B2 Preface
Do not turn the power on and off too often. If continuous power on and off is
needed, please be ensured the interval is one minute at most.
Terminal Wiring of the Main Circuit

When wiring, please disassemble the terminal socket from the servo drive.
One terminal of the terminal socket for one electric wire only.
When inserting the electric wires, do not connect the conductor to the
adjacent wire.
Before connecting to the power, please inspect and be ensured the wiring is
correct.
NOTE
If there is any difference of each version, please refer to DELTAs website

(http://www.delta.com.tw/industrialautomation/) for the latest information.
Revision December 2014 v

Preface ASDA-B2
(This page is intentionally left blank.)
vi Revision December 2014

Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Installation and Model Explanation ...................................................... 1-1
1.1 Inspection ........................................................................................................ 1-1
1.2 Product Model ................................................................................................. 1-2
1.2.1 Nameplate Information ........................................................................... 1-2
1.2.2 Model Explanation .................................................................................. 1-3
1.3 Servo Drive and Corresponding Servo Motor .................................................. 1-5
1.4 Servo Drive Features ...................................................................................... 1-7
1.5 Control Modes of Servo Drive ......................................................................... 1-8
Chapter 2 Installation .............................................................................................. 2-1
2.1 Notes ............................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Ambient Conditions of Storage ........................................................................ 2-1
2.3 Ambient Conditions of Installation ................................................................... 2-2
2.4 Installation Direction and Space ...................................................................... 2-3
2.5 Specification of Circuit Breaker and Fuse ....................................................... 2-5
2.6 EMI Filter Selection ......................................................................................... 2-6
2.7 Selection of Regenerative Resistor ................................................................. 2-8
Chapter 3 Wiring ...................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1 Connections .................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 Connecting to Peripheral Devices .......................................................... 3-1
3.1.2 Servo Drive Connectors and Terminals .................................................. 3-2
Revision December 2014 v

Table of Contents ASDA-B2
3.1.3 Wiring Method ........................................................................................ 3-4
3.1.4 Specification of Motor Power Cable ....................................................... 3-6
3.1.5 Specification of Encoder Connector ....................................................... 3-8
3.1.6 Selection of Wiring Rod .......................................................................... 3-11
3.2 Basic Wiring .................................................................................................... 3-13
3.2.1 200 W (included) and Models below ...................................................... 3-13
3.2.2 400 W ~ 750 W Models .......................................................................... 3-14
3.2.3 1 kW ~ 3 kW Models .............................................................................. 3-15
3.3 I / O Signal (CN1) Connection ......................................................................... 3-16
3.3.1 I/O Signal (CN1) Connector Terminal Layout ......................................... 3-16
3.3.2 Signals Explanation of Connector CN1 .................................................. 3-18
3.3.3 Wiring Diagrams (CN1) .......................................................................... 3-26
3.3.4 DI and DO Signal Specified by Users ..................................................... 3-33
3.4 CN2 Connector .............................................................................................. 3-34
3.5 Wiring of CN3 Connector ................................................................................ 3-36
3.6 Analog Monitor Output Connector - CN5 ......................................................... 3-37
3.7 Standard Connection Example ........................................................................ 3-38
3.7.1 Position (PT) Control Mode .................................................................... 3-38
3.7.2 Speed Control Mode .............................................................................. 3-39
3.7.3 Torque Control Mode ............................................................................. 3-40
Chapter 4 Panel Display and Operation................................................................. 4-1
4.1 Panel Description ............................................................................................ 4-1
4.2 Parameter Setting Procedure .......................................................................... 4-2
vi Revision December 2014

ASDA-B2 Table of Contents
4.3 Status Display ................................................................................................. 4-3
4.3.1 Save Setting Display .............................................................................. 4-3
4.3.2 Decimal Point ......................................................................................... 4-3
4.3.3 Alarm Message ...................................................................................... 4-3
4.3.4 Positive and Negative Sign Setting ........................................................ 4-4
4.3.5 Monitor Display ....................................................................................... 4-4
4.4 General Function ............................................................................................. 4-7
4.4.1 Operation of Fault Code Display ............................................................ 4-7
4.4.2 JOG Mode .............................................................................................. 4-8
4.4.3 Force DO Output .................................................................................... 4-9
4.4.4 Digital Input Diagnosis Operation ........................................................... 4-10
4.4.5 Digital Output Diagnosis Operation ........................................................ 4-11
Chapter 5 Trial Operation and Tuning ................................................................... 5-1
5.1 Inspection without Load................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Applying Power to the Servo Drive .................................................................. 5-3
5.3 JOG Trial Run without Load ............................................................................ 5-7
5.4 Trial Run without Load (Speed Mode) ............................................................. 5-8
5.5 Tuning Procedure ............................................................................................ 5-10
5.5.1 Flowchart of Tuning Procedure .............................................................. 5-11
5.5.2 Inertia Estimation Flowchart (with Mechanism) ...................................... 5-12
5.5.3 Flowchart of Auto Tuning........................................................................ 5-13
5.5.4 Flowchart of Semi-Auto Tuning .............................................................. 5-14
5.5.5 Limit of Inertia Ratio ............................................................................... 5-15
Revision December 2014 vii

5.5.6 Mechanical Resonance Suppression Method ........................................ 5-17
5.5.7 Tuning Modes and Parameters .............................................................. 5-18
5.5.8 Tuning in Manual Mode .......................................................................... 5-19
Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation .................................................................. 6-1
6.1 Selection of Operation Mode ........................................................................... 6-1
6.2 Position Mode ................................................................................................. 6-3
6.2.1 Position Command in PT Mode .............................................................. 6-3
6.2.2 Control Structure of Position Mode ......................................................... 6-6
6.2.3 Electronic Gear Ratio ............................................................................. 6-7
6.2.4 Low-pass Filter ....................................................................................... 6-9
6.2.5 Gain Adjustment of Position Loop .......................................................... 6-9
6.3 Speed Mode .................................................................................................... 6-12
6.3.1 Selection of Speed Mode ....................................................................... 6-12
6.3.2 Control Structure of Speed Mode ........................................................... 6-13
6.3.3 Smoothing Speed Command ................................................................. 6-14
6.3.4 The Scaling of Analog Command ........................................................... 6-18
6.3.5 Timing Diagram in Speed Mode ............................................................. 6-19
6.3.6 Gain Adjustment of Speed Loop............................................................. 6-19
6.3.7 Resonance Suppression ........................................................................ 6-26
6.4 Torque Mode ................................................................................................... 6-34
6.4.1 Selection of Torque Command ............................................................... 6-34
6.4.2 Control Structure of Torque Mode .......................................................... 6-35
6.4.3 Smooth Torque Mode ............................................................................. 6-36
viii Revision December 2014

6.4.4 The Scaling of Analog Command ........................................................... 6-36
6.4.5 Timing Diagram of Torque Mode ............................................................ 6-38
6.5 Dual Modes ..................................................................................................... 6-39
6.5.1 Speed / Position Dual Mode ................................................................... 6-39
6.5.2 Speed / Torque Dual Mode .................................................................... 6-40
6.5.3 Torque / Position Dual Mode .................................................................. 6-40
6.6 Others ............................................................................................................. 6-41
6.6.1 The Use of Speed Limit .......................................................................... 6-41
6.6.2 The Use of Torque Limit ......................................................................... 6-41
6.6.3 Analog Monitor ....................................................................................... 6-42
6.6.4 The Use of Brake ................................................................................... 6-47
Chapter 7 Parameters.............................................................................................. 7-1
7.1 Parameter Definition........................................................................................ 7-1
7.2 Lists of Parameters ......................................................................................... 7-2
7.3 Parameter Description ..................................................................................... 7-12
P0-xx Monitor Parameters ............................................................................... 7-12
P1-xx Basic Parameters .................................................................................. 7-22
P2-xx Extension Parameters ........................................................................... 7-49
P3-xx Communication Parameters .................................................................. 7-77
P4-xx Diagnosis Parameters ........................................................................... 7-82
Table 7.1 Function Description of Digital Input (DI) ......................................... 7-92
Table 7.2 Function Description of Digital Input Output (DO) ............................ 7-98
Revision December 2014 ix

Chapter 8 Communications .................................................................................... 8-1
8.1 RS485 & RS-232 Communication Hardware Interface.................................... 8-1
8.2 RS485 & RS-232Communication Parameter Settings .................................... 8-3
8.3 MODBUS Communication Protocol................................................................. 8-6
8.4 Write-in and Read-out Communication Parameters ........................................ 8-16
Chapter 9 Troubleshooting ..................................................................................... 9-1
9.1 Alarm of Servo Drive ....................................................................................... 9-1
9.2 Causes and Corrective Actions ....................................................................... 9-4
9.3 Corrective Actions after the Alarm Occurs ...................................................... 9-15
Chapter 10 Specifications ....................................................................................... 10-1
10.1 Specifications of Servo Drives (ASDA-B2 Series) ......................................... 10-1
10.2 Specifications of Servo Motors (ECMA Series) ............................................. 10-4
10.3 Torque Features (T-N Curves) ...................................................................... 10-12
10.4 Overload Features ......................................................................................... 10-14
10.5 Dimensions of Servo Drives .......................................................................... 10-16
10.6 Dimensions of Servo Motors ......................................................................... 10-20
Appendix A Accessories ........................................................................................ A-1
Appendix B Maintenance and Inspection.............................................................. B-1
x Revision December 2014

About this Manual
User Information
Be sure to store this manual in a safe place.
Due to constantly growing product range, technical improvement, alteration or changed
texts, figures and diagrams, we reserve the right to make information changes within this
manual without prior notice.
Coping or reproducing any part of this manual, without written consent of Delta Electronics
Inc. is prohibited.
Technical Support and Service

Welcome to contact us or visit our web site (http://www.delta.com.tw/ia/) if you need any
technical support, service and information, or, if you have any question in using the
product. We are looking forward to serve you needs and willing to offer our best support
and service to you. Reach us by the following ways.
ASIA JAPAN
DELTA ELECTRONICS, INC. DELTA ELECTRONICS (JAPAN), INC.
Taoyuan Plant 3 Tokyo Office
No.18, Xinglong Rd., DELTA SHIBADAIMON BUILDING
Taoyuan City, Taoyuan County 33068, 2-1-14 SHIBADAIMON, MINATO-KU,
TAIWAN, R.O.C.
TOKYO, 105-0012, JAPAN
TEL: 886-3-362-6301
TEL: 81-3-5733-1111
FAX: 886-3-362-7267
FAX: 81-3-5733-1211
NORTH/SOUTH AMERICA EUROPE

DELTA PRODUCTS CORPORATION (USA) DELTRONICS (THE NETHERLANDS) B.V.
Raleigh Office Eindhoven Office
P.O. BOX 12173 DE WITBOGT 15, 5652 AG EINDHOVEN,
5101 DAVIS DRIVE, THE NETHERLANDS
RESEARCH TRIANGLE PARK, NC 27709, TEL: 31-40-259-2850
U.S.A. FAX: 31-40-259-2851
TEL: 1-919-767-3813
FAX: 1-919-767-3969
Revision December 2014 xi

xii Revision December 2014

Chapter 1 Installation and Model
Explanation
1.1 Inspection
In order to prevent the negligence during purchasing and delivery, please inspect the
following items carefully.
Item Content
Please check if the Check the part number of the motor and the servo drive on
product is what you have the nameplate. Refer to the section 1.2 for the model
purchased explanation.
Rotate the motor shaft by hand. If it can be rotated
Check if the motor shaft smoothly, it means the motor shaft is normal. However, it
can rotate smoothly cannot be rotated by hand if the motor has an
electromagnetic brake.
Check if there is any
Visually check if there is any damage or scrape of the
damage shown on its
appearance.
appearance
Check if there is any loose
If the screws are un-tightened or fall off.
screw
If any of the above situations happens, please contact the distributors to solve the
problems.
A complete and workable servo set should include:

(1) A Servo drive and a servo motor
(2) A UVW motor power cable, red (U), white (V) and black (W) wires can connect to
the socket attached by the servo drive. And a green ground wire which should be
locked to the ground terminal of the servo drive. (selective purchase)
(3) An encoder cable which connects to the socket of the encoder. One side of it
connects to CN2 servo drive and another side is the plug. (selective purchase)
(4) 44-PIN connector which is used in CN1 (CviLux analog product) (selective
purchase)
(5) 9-PIN connector which is used in CN2 (CviLux analog product) (selective purchase)
(6) 6-PIN connector which is used in CN3 (CviLux analog product) (selective purchase)
Revision December 2014 1-1

Chapter 1 Installation and Model Explanation ASDA-B2
1.2 Product Model

1.2.1 Nameplate Information
ASDA-B2 Series Servo Drive
Nameplate Information
Serial Number
ECMA Series Servo Motor

Nameplate Information
Serial Number
1-2 Revision December 2014

ASDA-B2 Chapter 1 Installation and Model Explanation
1.2.2 Model Explanation

ASDA-B2 Series Servo Drive
A S D - B 2 - 0 4 2 1 -
Model Type
Input Voltage and Phase

21: 220V 1 phase
23: 220V 3 phase
Rated Power Input

01: 100W 20: 2kW
02: 200W 30: 3kW
04: 400W
07: 750W
10: 1kW
15: 1.5kW
Product Series
B2
Product Name
AC SERVO Drive
Model Type
Full-Closed Extension Port for

Type EtherCAT CANopen DMCNET E-CAM
Control Digital Input
B

ECMA Series Servo Motor
E C M A - C 1 0 6 0 2 E S
Standard Shaft Diameter: S
Specific Shaft Diameter: 3=42mm, 7=14mm
Type of Shaft w/o with w/o With

Diameter Brake Brake Brake Brake
and w/o Oil w/o Oil with Oil With Oil
Oil Seal Seal Seal
Seal Seal
Round Shaft
(with fixed A B C D
screw holes)
Keyway E F G H
Keyway
(with fixed P Q R S
screw holes)
Rated Power Output

01:100W 05:500W 10:1.0kW
02:200W 06:600W 15:1.5kW
03:300W 07:700W 20:2.0kW
04:400W 09:900W 30:3.0kW
Motor Frame Size

04:40mm 09:86mm 18:180mm
06:60mm 10:100mm
08:80mm 13:130mm
Name of the Series

Rated Voltage and Rated Speed
C = 220V/3,000 rpm; E = 220V/2,000 rpm;
F = 220V/1,500 rpm; G = 220V/1,000 rpm;
Encoder Type
1: Incremental, 20-bit
2: Incremental, 17-bit
3: 2500ppr
M: Magnetic encoder, 13-bit
Servo Type
A: AC Servo
Product Name
ECM: Electronic
Commutation Motor

1.3 Servo Drive and Corresponding Servo Motor

Motor Servo Drive
Max.
Max. Continuous
Rated Instantaneous
Motor Power
Output
Model Number Current
Instantaneous
Model Number
Output
output
series (W) current Current
(Arms) current
(A) (Arms)
(A)
100 ECMA-C0401S 0.90 2.70 ASD-B2-0121- 0.90 2.70

200 ECMA-C0602S 1.55 4.65 ASD-B2-0221- 1.55 4.65
ECMA-C 3000 r/min
400 ECMA-C0604S 2.60 7.80

ASD-B2-0421- 2.60 7.80
400 ECMA-C08047 2.60 7.80
Low Inertia
Single- 750 ECMA-C0807S 5.10 15.30

/Three- ASD-B2-0721- 5.10 15.30
phase 750 ECMA-C0907S 3.66 11.00
1000 ECMA-C0910S 4.25 12.37
ASD-B2-1021- 7.30 21.90
1000 ECMA-C1010S 7.30 21.90
2000 ECMA-C1020S 12.05 36.15 ASD-B2-2023- 13.40 40.20
3000 ECMA-C13304 17.2 47.5 ASD-B2-3023- 19.40 58.20
500 ECMA-E1305S 2.90 8.70 ASD-B2-0421- 2.60 7.80
ECMA-E 2000 r/min
1000 ECMA-E1310S 5.60 16.80 ASD-B2-1021- 7.30 21.90

Medium Inertia
Single- 1500 ECMA-E1315S 8.30 24.90 ASD-B2-1521- 8.30 24.90

/Three- 2000 ECMA-E1320S 11.01 33.03
phase 2000 ECMA-E1820S 11.22 ASD-B2-2023- 13.40 40.20
33.66
3000 ECMA-E1830S 16.10 48.30
ASD-B2-3023- 19.40 58.20
3500 ECMA-E1835S 19.20 57.60
850 ECMA-F1308S 7.10 19.40 ASD-B2-1021- 7.30 21.90
Medium-high
1500 r/min
ECMA-F
Single- 1300 ECMA-F1313S 12.60

inertia
38.60
/Three- ASD-B2-2023- 13.40 40.20
phase 1800 ECMA-F1318S 13.00 36.00
3000 ECMA-F1830S 19.40 58.20 ASD-B2-3023- 19.40 58.20
400 ECMA-C0604H 2.60 7.80 ASD-B2-0421- 2.60 7.80
ECMA-C/G 3000
High Inertia
750 ECMA-C0807H 5.10 15.30 ASD-B2-0721- 5.10 15.30

Single-
r/min
/Three- 300 ECMA-G1303S 2.50 7.50 ASD-B2-0421- 2.60 7.80

phase
600 ECMA-G1306S 4.80 14.40 ASD-B2-0721- 5.10 15.30
900 ECMA-G1309S 7.50 22.50 ASD-B2-1021- 7.30 21.90

NOTE 1) The boxes () at the ends of the servo drive model names are the
mode code of ASDA-B2. Please refer to the ordering information of the
actual purchased product.
2) The boxes () in the model names are for encoder resolution types.
=1: Incremental type, 20-bit; =2: Incremental type, 17-bit; =3: 2500
ppr; =A: Absolute type). The listed motor model name is for
information searching, please contact to your local distributors for
actual purchased product.
3) The boxes () in the model names represents brake or keyway / oil
seal.
4) The above table shows the specification of servo drive which has triple
rated current. If you need 6 times rated current for your servo drive,
please contact with local distributors. For detailed specification of the
servo motor and servo drive, please refer to Chapter 10.

1.4 Servo Drive Features

1.5 Control Modes of Servo Drive

Various operation modes are provided. Please refer to the following table:
Mode Code Description
Servo drive receives the position command and
Position Mode commands the servo motor to the target position.
P
(Terminal Input) The position command is sent from CN1 and its
signal type is pulse.
Servo drive receives the speed command and
commands the servo motor to the target speed.
Speed Mode S Speed command is from the internal register (there
are 3 in total) or external analog voltage (-10V ~
+10V). The command can be selected by DI.
Servo drive receives the speed command and
commands the servo motor to the target speed.
Speed Mode Speed command is from internal register only (there
Sz
Single (No analog input) are 3 in total) and the command can be selected by
Mode DI. The external analog voltage command is not
available in Sz mode.
Servo drive receives the torque command and
commands the servo motor to the target torque.
Torque Mode T Torque command is from the internal register (there
are 3 in total) or external analog voltage (-10V ~
+10V). The command can be selected by DI.
Servo drive receives the torque command and
commands the servo motor to the target torque.
Torque Mode Torque command is from internal register only (there
Tz
(No analog input) are 3 in total) and the command can be selected by
DI. The external analog voltage command is not
available in Tz mode.
Either S or P control mode can be selected via the
S-P Digital Input (DI) (Please refer to Chapter 7, table 7-
1, Function Description of Digital Input (0x18)).
Either T or P control mode can be selected via the
Dual Mode T-P Digital Input (DI) (Please refer to Chapter 7, table 7-
Either S or T control mode can be selected via the
S-T Digital Input (DI) (Please refer to Chapter 7, table 7-
Users can use P1-01 to select the control mode. When the setting of new control mode is
complete, please re-power on the servo drive to take the new mode into effect.

Chapter 2 Installation
2.1 Notes
Please pay close attention to the followings:
Do not strain the cables between the servo drive and servo motor.
Make sure to each screw is tightened when fixing the servo drive.
The motor shaft and the ball screw should be parallel.
If the connection between the servo drive and the servo motor is over 20 meters,
please thicken the connecting wire, UVW as well as the encoder cable.
Tighten the fixed four screws of the motor.
2.2 Ambient Conditions of Storage

Before the installation, this product has to be kept in shipping carton. In order to retain the
warranty coverage and for the maintenance, please follow the instructions below when
storage, if the product is not in use temporally:
Store the product in a dry and dust-free location.
Store the product within an ambient temperature range of -20 to +65 (-4F to
149F).
Store the product within a relative humidity range of 0% to 90% and a non-condensing
environment.
Avoid storing the product in the environment of corrosive gas and liquid.
It is better to store the product in shipping carton and put it on the shelf or working
platform.

Chapter 2 Installation ASDA-B2
2.3 Ambient Conditions of Installation

Operating Temperature
ASDA-B2 Series Servo Drive : 0C to 55C (32F to 131F)
ECMA Series Servo Motor : 0C to 40C (32F to 104F)
The ambient temperature of servo drive should be under 45C (113F) for long-term
reliability.
If the temperature of servo drive is greater than 45C, please place the product in a well-
ventilated environment so as to ensure its reliability performance. If the product is installed
in an electric box, make sure the size of the electric box and its ventilation condition will
not overheat and endanger the internal electronic device. Also, pay attention to the
vibration of the machine. Check if the vibration will influence the electronic device of the
electric box. Failure to observe the following precautions may void the warranty. The
ambient conditions should also include:
Location has no over-heat device, no water drop, vapor, dust and oily dust, no
corrosive and inflammable gas and liquid, no airborne dust and metal particles, with
solid foundation and no vibration and no interference of electromagnetic noise.
Do not mount the servo drive or motor in a location where temperatures and humidity
will exceed specification.
Do not mount the servo drive or motor in a location where vibration and shock will
exceed specification.
Make sure the storage environment of servo drive and servo motor complies with the
specification which mentioned in Chapter 10.

ASDA-B2 Chapter 2 Installation
2.4 Installation Direction and Space

Notes:
Incorrect installation may result in a drive malfunction or premature failure of the drive
and or motor.
The ASDA-B2 servo drive should be mounted perpendicular to the wall or in the
control panel. In order to ensure the drive is well ventilated, ensure that the all
ventilation holes are not obstructed and sufficient free space is given to the servo
drive. Do not install the drive in a horizontal position or malfunction and damage will
occur.
Do not parallel connect the servo drive, or it might burn out the soft-start resistance or
the commutator and danger will occur.
Drive Mounting
The ASDA-B2 servo drives must be back mounted vertically on a dry and solid surface
such as a NEMA enclosure. A minimum spacing of two inches must be maintained above
and below the drive for ventilation and heat dissipation. Additional space may be
necessary for wiring and cable connections. Also, as the drive conducts heat away via the
mounting, the mounting plane or surface should not conduct heat into the drive from
external sources
Motor Mounting
The ECMA servo motors should be mounted firmly to a dry and solid mounting surface to
ensure maximum heat transfer for maximum power output and to provide a good ground.
For the dimensions and weights specifications of servo drive or motor, please refer to
Chapter 10 - Specifications.

Scheme of Installation
In order to have smaller wind resistance of the fan and increase the ventilation, please
follow the suggested clearance value when installing one or more than one servo drives.
(Refer to the following diagrams)
The above diagrams are not in equal proportion. Please refer to the
NOTE annotation.

2.5 Specification of Circuit Breaker and Fuse

Caution: Please use the fuse and circuit breaker that is recognized by UL/CSA.
Servo Drive Model Circuit Breaker Fuse (Class T)

Operation Mode General General
ASD-B2-0121-B 5A 5A
ASD-B2-0221-B 5A 6A
ASD-B2-0421-B 10A 10A
ASD-B2-0721-B 10A 20A
ASD-B2-1021-B 15A 25A
ASD-B2-1521-B 20A 40A
ASD-B2-2023-B 30A 50A
ASD-B2-3023-B 30A 70A
NOTE
If the servo drive equips with earth leakage circuit breaker for avoiding electric leakage,
please choose the current sensitivity which is over 200mA and can continue up to 0.1
seconds.

2.6 EMI Filter Selection

Recommended EMI Filter
Item Power Servo Drive Model FootPrint
1PH 3PH
1 100W ASD-B2-0121-B RF007S21AA RF022M43AA N
5 1000W ASD-B2-1021-B RF015B21AA RF075M43BA N
6 1500W ASD-B2-1521-B RF015B21AA RF075M43BA N
7 2000W ASD-B2-2023-B - RF037B43BA N
8 3000W ASD-B2-3023-B - RF037B43BA N
EMI Filter Installation

All electronic equipment (including servo drive) generates high or low frequency noise
during operation and interfere the peripheral equipments via conduction or radiation. With
EMI Filter and the correct installation, much interference can be eliminated. It is suggested
to use Deltas EMI Filter to suppress the interference better.
When installing servo drive and EMI Filter, please follow the instructions of the user
manual and make sure it meets the following specification.
1. EN61000-6-4 (2001)
2. EN61800-3 (2004) PDS of category C2
3. EN55011+A2 (2007) Class A Group 1
General Precaution
In order to ensure the best performance of EMI Filter, apart from the instructions of servo
drive installation and wiring, please follow the precautions mention below:
1. The servo drive and EMI Filter should be installed on the same metal plate.
2. When installing servo drive and EMI Filter, the servo drive should be installed above
the EMI Filter.
3. The wiring should be as short as possible.
4. The metal plate should be well grounded.
5. The metal cover of the servo drive and EMI Filter or grounding should be firmly fixed
on the metal plate. Also, the contact area should be as large as possible.

Motor Cable Selection and Installation Precautions

The selection of motor cables and installation affect the performance of EMI Filter. Please
follow the precautions mention below.
1. Use the cable that has braid shielding (The effect of double shielding is better)
2. The shield on both sides of the motor cable should be grounded in the shortest
distance and the largest contact area.
3. The protective paint of the U-shape saddle and metal plate should be removed in
order to ensure the good contact. Please see disgram 1.
4. It should have correct connection between the braid shielding of the motor cable and
the metal plate. The braid shielding on both sides of the motor cable should be fixed
by the U-shape saddle and metal plate. Please see diagram 2 for the correct
connection.
Figure 1
Saddle on both ends
Saddle on one end
Figure 2

2.7 Selection of Regenerative Resistor

When the direction of pull-out torque is different from the rotation, it means the electricity is
sent back to the servo drive from the load-end. It becomes the capacitance of DC Bus and
increases the voltage. When the voltage increases to a specific value, the come-back
eletricity can only be consumed by regenerative resistor. There is a built-in regenerative
resistor in the servo drive. Users can also use the external regenerative resistor if needed.
Specification of built-in regenerative resistor provided by ASDA-B2
Specification of built-in regenerative

resistor *1The capacity of built- Min. Allowable
Servo Drive
in regenerative Resistance
(kW) Resistance Capacity resistor (Watt) (Ohm)
(P1-52) (Ohm) (P1-53) (Watt)
0.1 - - - 60
0.2 - - - 60
0.4 100 60 30 60
0.75 100 60 30 60
1.0 40 60 30 30
1.5 40 60 30 30
2.0 20 100 50 15
3.0 20 100 50 15
*1 Regenerative Power Calculation: The amount of regenerative power (average value)
that can be processed is rated at 50% of the capacity of the servo drive's built-in
regenerative resistor. The regenerative power calculation method of external regenerative
resistor is the same.
When the regenerative resistor exceeds the capacity of built-in regenerative resistor, the
external regenerative resistor should be applied. Please pay special attention to the
followings when using the regenerative resistor.
1. Please correctly set up the resistance (P1-52) and capacity (P1-53) of regenerative
resistor. Or it might influence the performance of this function.
2. If users desire to use the external regenerative resistor, please make sure the
applied value is the same as the built-in regenerative resistor. If users desire to
connect it in parallel to increase the power of regenerative resistor, please make sure
the capacitance meets the requirements.
3. In natural environment, if the capacity of regenerative resistor (the average value) is
within the rated capacity, the temperature of the capacitance will increase to 120
or even higher (under the condition of regenerative energy keeps existing). For
safety concerns, please apply the method of forced cooling in order to reduce the
temperature of regenerative resistor. Or, it is suggested to use the regenerative

resistor which is equipped with thermal switches. Please contact the distributors for
load characteristics of the regenerative resistor.
When using the external regenerative resistor, the resistor should connect to P, C terminal
and the contact of P, D terminal should be opened. It is recommended to choose the
above mentioned capacitance. For easy calculation of regenerative resistor capacity,
except the energy consumed by IGBT, two ways are provided to select the capacity of
external regenerative resistor according to the selected linear motor or rotary motor.
(1) Regenerative Power Selection

(a) When the external load on torque does not exist
If the motor operates back and forth, the energy generated by the brake will go into the
capacitance of DC bus. When the voltage of the capacitance exceeds a specific value,
the redundant energy will be consumed by regenerative resistor. Two ways of selecting
regenerative resistor are provided here. The table below provides the energy
calculation method. Users can refer to it and calculate the selected regenerative
resistor.
Regenerative Max.
Servo Drive Rotor Inertia power from empty regenerative
Servo Motor 2 load 3000r/min to power of
(kW) J ( 10-4kg.m ) stop capacitance
Eo (joule) Ec(joule)
ECMA-
0.1 0.037 0.18 3
C0401
ECMA-
0.2 0.177 0.87 4
C0602
ECMA-
0.277 1.37 8
C0604
0.4
ECMA-
0.68 3.36 8
C0804
Low Inertia
ECMA-
0.75 1.13 5.59 14
C0807
ECMA-
1.0 2.65 13.1 18
C1010
ECMC-
1.0 2.62 12.96 18
C0910
ECMC-
2.0 4.45 22.0 21
C1020
ECMA-
3.0 12.7 62.80 28
C1330

Regenerative Max.
Rotor Inertia power from empty regenerative
Servo Drive
Servo Motor 2 load 3000r/min to power of
(kW) J ( 10-4kg.m ) stop capacitance
Eo (joule) Ec(joule)
0.4 ECMA-E1305 8.17 40.40 8
1.0 ECMA-E1310 8.41 41.59 18
1.5 ECMA-E1315 11.18 55.28 18
Medium Inertia
ECMA-E1320 14.59 72.15

2.0 21
ECMA-E1820 34.68 171.50
ECMA-E1830 54.95 217.73 28
3.0 ECMA-F1830 54.95 217.73 28
ECMA-E1835 54.95 217.73 28
1.0 ECMA-F1308 13.6 67.25 18
Medium-high
2.0 ECMA-F1313 20.0 98.90 21

Inertia
2.0 ECMA-F1318 24.9 123.13 21

3.0 ECMA-F1830 54.95 217.73 28
ECMA-
0.4 8.17 40.40 8
G1303
High Inertia
ECMA-
0.75 8.41 41.59 14
G1306
ECMA-
1.0 11.18 55.29 18
G1309
Eo = J x wr2/182 (joule), Wr : r/min

Assume that the load inertia is N times to the motor inertia and the motor decelerates
from 3000r/min to 0, its regenerative energy is (N+1) x Eo. The consumed regenerative
resistor is (N+1) Eo - Ec joule. If the cycle of back and forth operation is T sec, then
the power of regenerative resistor it needs is 2 ((N+1) x Eo - Ec) / T.
Followings are the calculation procedure:
Step Procedure Calculation and Setting Method
Set the capacity of regenerative
1 Set P1-53 to the maximum value
resistor to the maximum
Set T cycle of back and forth
2 Enter by the user
operation
3 Set the rotational speed wr Enter by the user or read via P0-02
4 Set the load/motor inertia ratio N Enter by the user or read via P0-02
Calculate the maximum
5 Eo= J * wr2/182
regenerative energy Eo

Set the absorbable regenerative

6 Refer to the above table
energy Ec
Calculate the needful capacitance
7 2 x ((N+1) xEo Ec) / T
of regenerative resistor
Take 400W as the example, the cycle of back and forth operation is T = 0.4sec, the
maximum speed is 3000r/min and the load inertia is 7 times to the motor inertia. Then,
the needful power of regenerative resistor is 2 ((7+1) 1.68 8) / 0.4 = 27.2 W. If it is
smaller than the built-in capacity of regenerative resistor, the built-in 60W regenerative
resistor will do. Generally speaking, when the need of the external load inertia is not
much, the built-in regenerative is enough. The diagram below describes the actual
operation. The smaller power of the regenerative resistor it is, the more energy it
accumulates and the higher temperature it will be. When the temperature is higher than
a specific value, ALE05 occurs.
(b) If the external load torque exists, the motor is in reverse rotation.
Usually, the motor is in forward rotation, which means the torque output direction of the
motor is the same as the rotation direction. However, in some applications, the
direction of torque output is different from the rotation. In this situation, the motor is in
reverse rotation. The external energy goes into the servo drive through the motor. The
diagram below is one example. When the external force direction is the same as the
moving direction, the servo system has to use the force of the opposite direction to
keep the speed and stability. Huge amount of energy will return to the servo drive at
the moment. When DC-BUS is full and unable to store the regenerative energy, the
energy will be leaded to regenerative resistor and consumed.
Motor Rotation Speed
External Load Torque
Motor Output Torque
Reverse Forward Reverse Forward

Rotation Rotation Rotation Rotation
Negative torque: TL Wr TL: external load torque

For safety reasons, please calculate it by considering the safest situation.

For example, when the external load torque is the +70% rated torque and the rotation
reaches 3000 r/min, then take 400 W (the rated torque is 1.27 Nt-m) as the example,
the user has to connect the regenerative resistor of 40, which is 2 (0.7 1.27) (3000
2 60) = 560W.
(2) Simple Selection

Choose the appropriate regenerative resistor according to the allowable frequency and
empty load frequency in actual operation. The so-called empty allowable frequency is the
frequency of continuous operation when the servo motor runs from 0r/min to the rated
speed and then decelerates from the rated speed to 0r/min within the shortest time. The
following table lists the allowable frequency when the servo drive runs without load
(times/min).
Allowable Frequencies for Servo Motor Running Without Load (times/min)
When Using Built-in Regenerative Resistor
Motor Capacity 600W 750W 900W 1.0kW 1.5kW 2.0kW 2.0kW 3.0kW
ECMA Series 06 07 09 10 15 20 20 30
83
ECMAC - 312 - 137 - -
(F100)
24 10
ECMAE - - - 42 32 11
(F130) (F180)
ECMAG 42 - 31 - - - - -
When the servo motor runs with load, the allowable frequency will be different
according to different load inertia or speed. The following is the calculation method.
m represents load / motor inertia ratio.

2
Allowable frequency when serv o motor run without load Rated s peed times
Allowable fr equency = x
m+1 Operating speed mi n.
The comparison table of external regenerative resistor is provided below. Please

choose the appropriate regenerative resistor according to the allowable frequency.
The table below describes the suggested allowable frequency (times/min) of
regenerative resistor when the servo drive runs without load.
When Using External Regenerative Resistor
Motor Capacity ECMA C

400W 400W
100W 200W 750W 1.0kW 2.0kW
(F60) (F80)
Regenerative Resistor 01 02 04 04 07 10 20
200W 80 32793 6855 4380 1784 1074 458 273
400W 40 - - - - - 916 545
1kW 30 - - - - - - 1363


Motor Capacity ECMAE

0.5kW 1kW 1.5kW 2.0kW 2.0kW 3.0kW
Regenerative Resistor 05 1.0 15 20 20 30
200W 80 149 144 109 83 35 22
400W 40 - 289 217 166 70 44
1kW 30 - - - 416 175 110

Motor Capacity ECMA G

0.3kW 0.6kW 0.9kW
Regenerative Resistor 03 06 09
200W 80 149 144 109
400W 40 - - 217
If watt is not enough when using regenerative resistor, connecting the same
regenerative resistor in parallel can increase the power.
Dimensions of Regenerative Resistor

Delta Part Number: BR400W040 (400 W 40 )
L1 L2 H D W MAX. WEIGHT(g)
265 250 30 5.3 60 930

Delta Part Number: BR1K0W020 (1 kW 20 )
L1 L2 H D W MAX. WEIGHT(g)
400 385 50 5.3 100 2800
NOTE
1) Regarding the selection of regenerative resistor, please refer to the table of

regenerative resistor specifications described in Appendix A.

Chapter 3 Wiring
This chapter provides information on wiring ASDA-B2 series products, the descriptions of
I/O signals and gives typical examples of wiring diagrams.
3.1 Connections
3.1.1 Connecting to Peripheral Devices

Chapter 3 Wiring ASDA-B2
NOTE Installation notes:

1. Check if the power and wiring among R, S, T and L1c, L2c are correct.
2. Please check if the output terminal U, V, W of the servo motor is correctly
wired. The incorrect wiring may disable the operation of the motor or cause
malfunction.
3. When applying to the external regenerative resistor, the contact between P
and D should be opened and the external regenerative resistor should
connect to terminal P and C. When applying to the internal regenerative
resistor, the contact between P and D should be closed and the contact
between P and C should be opened.
4. When an alarm occurs or the system is in emergency stop status, use
ALARM or WARN to output and disconnect the power of magnetic
contactor in order to disconnect the power of servo drive.
3.1.2 Servo Drive Connectors and Terminals

Terminal
Name Description
Signal
Used to connect single-phase AC control circuit
Control circuit
L1c, L2c power. (Control circuit uses the same voltage as
terminal
the main circuit.)
Used to connect three-phase AC main circuit
Main circuit
R, S, T power depending on connecting servo drive
terminal
model.
Used to connect servo motor
Terminal
Wire Color Description
Symbol
U Red Connecting to three-
U, V, W Servo motor
output V White phase motor main
FG ( ) circuit cable.
W Black
Connecting to
FG( ) Green ground terminal ( )
of the servo drive.
Ensure the circuit is closed between
Internal
P and D, and the circuit is open
Regenerative resistor
between P and C.
P , D, C, resistor terminal
or braking unit Connect regenerative resistor to P
External
and C, and ensure an open circuit
resistor
between P and D.

ASDA-B2 Chapter 3 Wiring
Terminal
Name Description
Signal
Connect braking unit to P and ,
and ensure an open circuit between
P and D, and P and C.
(N terminal is built in L1c, L2c, ,
External and R, S, T.)
braking unit
P : Connecting to (+) terminal of
V_BUS voltage.
: Connecting to (-) terminal of
V_BUS voltage.
two Used to connect grounding wire of power supply
Ground terminal
places and servo motor.
Used to connect external controllers. Please refer

CN1 I/O connector
to section 3.3 for details.
Encoder Used to connect encoder of servo motor. Please
CN2 connector refer to section 3.4 for details.
Communication Used to connect RS485 or RS-232. Please refer
CN3 connector to section 3.5 for details.
Reserved
CN4 Reserved
connector
Used to monitor the operation status. The drive
Analog voltage provides two channels, MON1 and MON2 to
CN5
output terminal output the analog voltage data. Output voltage is
reference to the power ground (GND).
Pay special attention to the followings when wiring:

1. When the power is cutoff, do not touch R, S, T and U, V, W since the
capacitance inside the servo drive still contains huge amount of electric charge.
Wait until the charging light is off.
2. Separate R, S, T and U, V, W from the other wires. The interval should be at

least 30 cm (11.8 inches).
3. If the wire of encoder CN2 connecter is not long enough, please use shielded
twisted-pair cable which cannot exceed 20 meters (65.62 inches). If it exceeds
20 meters, please choose the bigger wire diameter of signal cable to ensure it
will not cause signal fading.
4. When selecting the wire rod, please refer to Section 3.1.6.

3.1.3 Wiring Method

The wiring method is divided into single-phase and three-phase. Single-phase is for
1.5 kW and the model below 1.5 kW. In the diagram below, Power On is contact a,
Power Off and ALRM_RY are contact b. MC is the coil of magnetic contactor and self-
remaining power and is the contact of main power circuit.
Wiring Method of Single-phase Power Supply (suitable for 1.5 kW and models
below 1.5 kW)

Wiring Method of Three-phase Power Supply (suitable for all series)

3.1.4 Specification of Motor Power Cable

Terminal
Motor Model U, V, W / Connector of Brake
Identification
ECMA-C0401S (100W)
ECMA-C0602S (200W)
ECMA-C0604S (400W)
ECMA-C0604H (400W)
ECMA-CM0604PS (400W)
ECMA-C08047 (400W) A
ECMA-C0807S (750W)
ECMA-C0807H (750W) HOUSING: JOWLE (C4201H00-2*2PA)
ECMA-C0907S (750W)
ECMA-C0910S (1000W)
ECMA-C0602S (200W)
ECMA-C0604S (400W)
ECMA-C08047 (400W) B
ECMA-C0807S (750W)
ECMA-C0907S (750W)
ECMA-C0910S (1000W) HOUSING: JOWLE (C4201H00-2*3PA)
ECMA-G1303S (300W)
ECMA-E1305S (500W)
ECMA-G1306S (600W)
ECMA-F1308S (850W)
ECMA-G1309S (900W)
ECMA-C1010S (1000W)
ECMA-E1310S (1000W) C
ECMA-F1313S (1300W)
ECMA-E1315S (1500W)
ECMA-F1318S (1800W)
ECMA-C1020S (2000W) 3106A-20-18S
ECMA-E1320S (2000W)
ECMA-C13304 (3000W)

Terminal
Motor Model U, V, W / Connector of Brake
Identification
ECMA-E1820S (2000W)
ECMA-E1830S (3000W)
D
ECMA-F1830S (3000W)
ECMA-E1835S (3500W)
3106A-24-11S
CASE
Terminal U V W BRAKE1 BRAKE2
GROUND
Identification (Red) (White) (Black) (Blue) (Brown)
(Green)
A 1 2 3 4 - -
B 1 2 4 5 3 6
C F I B E G H
D D E F G A B
When selecting the wire rod, please choose 600V PVC cable and the length should not
longer than 30m. If the length exceeds 30m, please take the received voltage into
consideration when selecting the wire size. Please refer to Section 3.1.6 for wire rod
selection.
NOTE
1) The coil of brake has no polarity. The names of terminal identification are BRAKE1
and BRAKE2.
2) The power supply for brake is DC24V. Never use it for VDD, the +24V source
voltage.
3) Box, () in servo motor model represents brake or keyway / oil seal.
4) Box, () in servo motor model represents encoder type. =1: incremental, 20-bit;
=2: incremental, 17-bit; = 3: 33-bit; =A: absolute.

3.1.5 Specification of Encoder Cable Connector

Encoder Connection (Diagram 1)
NOTE This diagram shows the connection between the servo drive and the
motor encoder. It is not drawn by the practical scale and specification
will be different according to the selected servo drive and motor model.
1) Please refer to the Section of Specification and Definition of Encoder
Connector.
2) Please refer to section 3.4 CN2 Connector.
Motor Model Connector of Encoder Cable

ECMA-C0401S (100W)
ECMA-C0602S (200W)
ECMA-C0604S (400W)
ECMA-C0604H (400W)
ECMA-C08047 (400W)
ECMA-C0807S (750W)
ECMA-C0807H (750W)
ECMA-C0907S (750W)
ECMA-C0910S (1000W)

Terminal Identification of Encoder Connector

Connector of Connector of
Encoder Cable Motor Encoder
Housing : AMP(1-172161-9)
Servo Drive Motor

CN2 Encoder
View from
this side
View from this side
(Encoder type is 17bit , 20bit):
1 2 3
Blue 3 2 1
T+ Reserved Reserved White
-
4 5 6 Reserved T+
Blue/Black 6 5 4
T- Reserved Reserved White/Red
-
7 8 9 Reserved T-
Red/Red & Black/Black
white & white Shield 9 8 7
DC+5V GND Blue Brown
Shield
GND DC+5V
The wire color of the servo drive

is for reference only. Please refer (Encoder type is 2500ppr, 33bit):
to the real object.
3 2 1
White
Reserved Reserved T+
6 5 4
White/Red
Reserved Reserved T-
9 8 7
Blue Brown
Shield
GND DC+5V
1 1
2 2
Servo Drive 3 3 Motor

CN2 4 4 Encoder

If not using housing and directly wire the cores, please follow the corresponding core number for wiring. For
example, core number 1 from the servo drive CN2 should connect to core number 1 from the motor encoder;
core number 2 from the servo drive CN2 should connect to core number 2 from the motor encoder and so on.
Please number the cores from the servo drive in order and then connect it to the encoder.

Encoder Connection (Diagram 2)
NOTE This diagram shows the connection between the servo drive and the
motor encoder. It is not drawn by the practical scale and specification
will be different according to the selected servo drive and motor model.
1) Please refer to section 3.4 CN2 Connector.
Motor Model Connector of Encoder Cable

ECMA-G1303S (300W)
ECMA-E1305S (500W)
ECMA-G1306S (600W)
ECMA-GM1306PS (600W) Pin Terminal
Color
ECMA-F1308S (850W) No. Identification
ECMA-G1309S (900W) A T+ Blue
ECMA-GM1309PS (900W) Blue&
B T-
Black
ECMA-C1010S (1000W)
Red/Re
ECMA-E1310S (1000W) S DC+5V
d&White
ECMA-F1313S (1300W) Black/
ECMA-E1315S (1500W) R GND Black&
White
ECMA-F1318S (1800W)
BRAID
ECMA-C1020S (2000W) L
SHIELD
ECMA-E1320S (2000W)
ECMA-E1820S (2000W)
ECMA-C13304 (3000W)

ECMA-E1830S (3000W)
ECMA-F1830S (3000W)
ECMA-E1835S (3500W)
Please select shielded multi-core and the shielded cable should connect to the
SHIELD end. Please refer to the description of Section 3.1.6.
NOTE 1) Box, () in servo motor model represents brake or keyway / oil

seal.
2) Box, () in servo motor model represents encoder type. =1:
incremental, 20-bit; =2: incremental, 17-bit; = 3: 2500ppr; =
A: absolute.
3.1.6 Selection of Wiring Rod

The recommended wire rods are shown as the following table:
Servo Drive and corresponding Servo Power Wiring Wire Diameter mm (AWG)
Motor
L1c, L2c R, S, T U, V, W P ,C
ASD-B2-0121- ECMA-C0401S
ASD-B2-0221- ECMA-C0602S
ECMA-C0604S
ECMA-C0604H
ECMA-CM0604PS
ASD-B2-0421-
ECMA-C08047
ECMA-E1305S 1.3 2.1 0.82 2.1
ECMA-G1303S AWG16 AWG14 AWG18 AWG14
ECMA-C0807S
ECMA-C0807H
ECMA-CM0807PS
ASD-B2-0721-
ECMA-C0907S
ECMA-G1306S
ECMA-GM1306PS
ECMA-C0910S
ECMA-C1010S
ECMA-E1310S 1.3 2.1 1.3 2.1
ASD-B2-1021-
ECMA-F1308S AWG16 AWG14 AWG16 AWG14
ECMA-G1309S
ECMA-GM1309PS

ASD-B2-1521- ECMA-E1315S
ECMA-C1020S 1.3 2.1 2.1 2.1
ECMA-E1320S AWG16 AWG14 AWG14 AWG14
ASD-B2-2023- ECMA-E1820S
ECMA-F1313S
ECMA-F1318S
1.3 2.1 3.3 2.1
ECMA-C13304
AWG16 AWG14 AWG12 AWG14
ECMA-E1830S
ASD-B2-3023-
ECMA-E1835S
ECMA-F1830S
2
Encoder Wiring - Wire Diameter mm (AWG)
Servo Drive Model
Size Number Specification Standard Length
ASD-B2-0121-
ASD-B2-0221-
ASD-B2-0421-
ASD-B2-0721-
0.13 (AWG26) 10 core (4 pair) UL2464 3m (9.84ft.)
ASD-B2-1021-
ASD-B2-1521-
ASD-B2-2023-
ASD-B2-3023-
NOTE
1) Please use shielded twisted-pair cable for encoder wiring so as to reduce the
interference of the noise.
2) The shield should connect to the phase of SHIELD.
3) Please follow the Selection of Wire Rod when wiring in order to avoid the danger it
may occur.
4) Box, () at the end of the servo drive model represents the model code of ASDA-B2.
Please refer to the model information of the product you purchased.
5) (), in servo motor model represents encoder type. =1: incremental type, 20-bit;
=2: incremental type, 17, bit.
6) Box, () in servo motor model represents brake or keyway / oil seal.
7) Box, () in servo motor model represents encoder type. =1: incremental, 20-bit;
=2: incremental, 17-bit; = 3: 2500ppr; = A: absolute.

3.2 Basic Wiring

3.2.1 200 W (included) and Models Below
(without built-in regenerative resistor and cooling fan)

3.2.2 400 W ~ 750 W Models

(with built-in regenerative resistor, but without cooling fan)

3.2.3 1 kW~3 kW Models

(with built-in regenerative resistor and cooling fan)

3.3 I / O Signal (CN1) Connection

3.3.1 I/O Signal (CN1) Connector Terminal Layout
In order to have a more flexible communication with the master, 6 programmable
Digital Outputs (DO) and 9 programmable Digital Inputs (DI) are provided. The setting
of 9 digital inputs and 6 digital outputs of each axis provided by ASDA-B2, which are
parameter P2-10~P2-17, P2-36 and parameter P2-18~P2-22, P2-37 respectively. In
addition, the differential output encoder signal, A+, A-, B+, B-, Z+ and Z-, input of
analog torque command, analog speed/position command and pulse position
command are also provided. The followings are the pin diagrams.
Side View Rear View

16 DO6+ Digital output

1 DO4+ Digital output 31 DI7- Digital input
+24V power
17 VDD output (for
2 DO3- Digital output external I/O) 32 DI6- Digital input
Analog torque
18 T_REF
Input
3 DO3+ Digital output 33 DI5- Digital input
Analog input
19 GND
signal ground
4 DO2- Digital output 34 DI3- Digital input
Analog speed
20 V_REF
input (+) Pulse applied
5 DO2+ Digital output 35 PULL HI
Encoder power
21 OA
A pulse output High-speed
6 DO1- Digital output 36 /HPULSE
Encoder position pulse (-)
22 /OA
/A pulse output
7 DO1+ Digital output 37 /SIGN Position sign (-)
Encoder /B pulse
23 /OB
output High-speed
8 DI4- Digital input 38 HPULSE
Encoder /Z pulse position pulse (+)
24 /OZ
output
9 DI1- Digital input 39 SIGN Position sign (+)
Encoder B pulse
25 OB
output High-speed
10 DI2- Digital input 40 /HSIGN
position sign (-)
26 DO4- Digital output
Power
11 COM+ 41 /PULSE Pulse input (-)
input (12~24V)
High-speed
12 DI9- Digital input 42 HSIGN
position sign (+)
28 DO5+ Digital output
Encoder Z pulse
13 OZ Line-driver 43 PULSE Pulse input (+)
output Analog input
29 GND
signal ground
Encoder Z pulse
VDD(24V) power
14 COM- 44 OCZ Line-driver
ground
30 DI8- Digital input output

3.3.2 Signals Explanation of Connector CN1

The following details the signals listed in previous section:
General Signals
Wiring
Diagram
Signal Pin No Funciton
(Refer to
3.3.3)
(1) The speed command of the motor is
-10 V ~ +10 V which means the
speed command is -3000 ~ +3000
r/min (default). It can change the
V_REF 20 corresponding range via parameters. C1
Analog (2) The position command of the motor
Command is -10 V ~ +10 V which means the
(input) position command is -3 cycles ~ +3
cycles (default).
The torque command of the motor is -10
T_REF 18 V ~ +10 V which means the rated torque C1
command of -100 % ~ +100 %.
Position pulse can be inputted by Line
Driver (single phase max. frequency
500KHz) or open-collector (single phase
PULSE 43 max. frequency 200 KHz). Three kinds
Position /PULSE 41 of command type can be selected via
Pulse SIGN 39 P1-00, CW pulse + CCW pulse, pulse + C3/C4
(Input) /SIGN 37 direction, A pulse + B pulse.
PULL HI 35 When position pulse uses open-
collector, the terminal should be
connected to an external applied power
in order to pull high.
High position pulse command only
High- HPULSE 38 accepts differential input (+5V, Line-
speed /HPULSE 36 Drive). The max. input frequency is
Position 4MHz. Three kinds of command type C4-2
Pulse HSIGN 42 can be selected via P1-00, CW pulse +
Input /HSIGN 40 CCW pulse, pulse + direction, A pulse +
B pulse.
OA 21
/OA 22
OB 25 Encoder signal output A, B, Z (Line
Position C13/C14
/OB 23 Drive output)
Pulse
(Output) OZ 13
/OZ 24
Encoder signal output Z (Open-collector
OCZ 44 -
output).

VDD is the +24 V power provided by the

drive and is for Digital Input (DI) and
VDD 17
Digital Output (DO) signal. The
maximum current is 500 mA.
COM+ is the common input of Digital
Input (DI) and Digital Output (DO)
Power voltage. When using VDD, VDD should -
COM+ 11 be connected to COM+. If not using, it
COM- 14 needs to apply the external power (+12
V ~ + 24 V). Its positive end should
connect to COM+ and the negative end
should connect to COM-.
GND 19 VCC voltage is based on GND.
There are numerous operation mode of this servo drive (please refer to Chapter 6.1).
Each operation mode needs different I/O signal. In order to use the terminal in a more
efficient way, the selection of I/O signal has to be programmable. That is to say, users
can choose the desired DI/DO signal to meet the demand. Basically, the default setting
of DI/DO signal has already have the appropriate function which can satisfy the demand
of normal application.
Users have to select the operation mode based on the needs first (please refer to
Chapter 6.1 for the introduction of each mode) and refer to the following DI/DO table to
know the corresponding default setting of DI/DO signal and Pin No of the selected mode
in order to conduct the wiring.
The table below lists the default setting of DI/DO signal function and pin No:
The explanation of DO signal default setting is as the followings.
DO Operation Pin No. Wiring Method

Details
Signal Mode (Refer to 3.3.3)
+ -
When the servo drive applies to the
power and no alarm (ALRM) occurs
SRDY ALL 7 6
in control circuit and motor power
circuit, this DO is ON.
When the DI.SON is ON and the
SON N/A - - motor servo circuit can operate
smoothly, this DO is ON. C5/C6/C7/C8
When the motor speed is slower than
ZSPD ALL 5 4 the setting value of parameter P1-38,
this DO is ON.
ALL When the motor actual speed (r/min)
TSPD (except - - is faster than the setting value of
PT) parameter P1-39, this DO is ON.

When the deviation between the

motor command and actual position
PT, PT-S,
TPOS 1 26 (PULSE) is smaller than the setting
PT-T
value of parameter P1-54, this DO is
ON.
Not When torque is limiting, this DO is
TQL - -
assigned ON.
When the alarm occurs (except
forward/reverse limit, emergency
ALRM ALL 28 27
stop, communication error, under
voltage), this DO is ON.
BRKR ALL - - Control contact of brake.
When the overload level is reached,
OLW ALL - -
this DO is ON.
A warning occurs.
When it is in the status of
WARN ALL - - forward/reverse limit, emergency
stop, communication error, under
voltage, this DO is ON.
When the deviation between the
speed command and the feedback
S_CMP S, Sz - - speed of the motor is smaller than the
setting value of parameter P1-47, this
DO is ON.
NOTE
1) For example, if the user selects S mode, pin 3 and 2 are TSPD.
2) The unlisted Pin No means the signal is not the preset one. If users want to use it,
parameters need to be changed and set as the desired ones. Please refer to
Section 3.3.4 for further details.

The explanation of DI signal default setting is as the followings

DI Operatio Pin Wiring Method
Function
Signal n Mode No. (Refer to 3.3.3)
When DI is ON, the servo circuit will be
SON ALL 9 activated and the motor coil will generate
current.
When the alarm (ALRM) occurs, this
ARST ALL 33 signal is used to reset the servo drive and
output the signal, Ready (SRDY) again.
C9/C10
GAINUP ALL - It is for switching the controller gain. C11/C12
CCLR PT 10 It is for clearing the deviation counter.
When this DI is ON and the motor speed
is slower than the setting of P1-38, the
ZCLAMP ALL -
motor position will be locked when the
signal is triggered.
When this DI is ON, the motor will operate
CMDINV T, S -
in the opposite direction.
ON means the torque limit command is
TRQLM S, Sz 10
effective.
ON means the speed limit command is
SPDLM T, Tz 10
effective.
STOP - - Motor stops.
SPD0 34 Select the source of speed command:
SPD1 SPD0 Command source
S mode: analog input

S, Sz, OFF OFF
Sz mode: 0
PT-S, S- C9/C10
SPD1 T 8
OFF ON P1-09
C11/C12
ON OFF P1-10
ON ON P1-11
PT, T, Select the source of torque command:

TCM0 34
Tz, PT-T
TCM1 TCM0 Command source
T mode: analog input

OFF OFF
Tz mode: 0
TCM1 S-T 8 OFF ON P1-12
ON OFF P1-13
ON ON P1-14

DI Operatio Pin Wiring Method

Function
Signal n Mode No. (Refer to 3.3.3)
Mode switching. OFF: Speed; ON:
S-P PT-S 31
Position
S-T S-T 31 Mode switching. OFF: Speed; ON: Torque
Mode switching. OFF: Torque; ON:
T-P PT-T 31
Position
It is contact B and has to be ON
EMGS ALL 30 frequently; otherwise the alarm (ALRM)
will occur.
PT, S, T Reverse inhibit limit (contact B) and has

NL(CWL) 32 to be ON frequently; or the alarm (ALRM)
Sz, Tz will occur.
PT, S, T Forward inhibit limit (contact B) and has

PL(CCWL) 31 to be ON frequently; or the alarm (ALRM)
Sz, Tz will occur.
TLLM N/A - Reverse operation torque limit
TRLM N/A - Forward operation torque limit
When this DI is ON, the motor JOG
JOGU ALL -
operates in forward direction.
When this DI is ON, the motor JOG
JOGD ALL -
operates in reverse direction.
Electronic gear ratio (numerator) selection
GNUM0 PT, PT-S - 0 (Please refer to P2-60~P2-62 for gear
ratio selection (numerator).)
Electronic gear ratio (numerator) selection
GNUM1 PT, PT-S - 1 (Please refer to P2-60~P2-62 for gear
ratio selection (numerator).)
In position mode, when this DI is ON, the C9/C10
INHP PT, PT-S - external pulse input command is not
working. C11/C12
The default setting of DI and DO in each operation mode is shown as the followings.
Please note that the following table neither detail the information as the previous one
nor show the Pin number of each signal. However, each operation mode is separated
in different columns in order to avoid the confusion.

Table 3.1 Default Value of DI Function

DI
Symbol Function PT S T Sz Tz PT-S PT-T S-T
Code
SON 0x01 Servo On DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1
ARST 0x02 Alarm Reset DI5 DI5 DI5 DI5 DI5
GAINUP 0x03 Gain switching
CCLR 0x04 Pulse clear DI2 DI2 DI2
ZCLAMP 0x05 Zero speed CLAMP
The input command
CMDINV 0x06 will be in reverse
direction
Reserved 0x07 Reserved
TRQLM 0x09 Torque limit DI2 DI2
SPDLM 0x10 Speed limit DI2 DI2
STOP 0x46 Motor stop
Speed command
SPD0 0x14 DI3 DI3 DI3 DI3
selection 0
Speed command
SPD1 0x15 DI4 DI4 DI4 DI4
selection 1
Torque command
TCM0 0x16 DI3 DI3 DI3 DI3 DI5
selection 0
Torque command
TCM1 0x17 DI4 DI4 DI4 DI4 DI6
selection 1
Mode switch between
S-P 0x18 speed and position DI7
command
Mode switch between
S-T 0x19 speed and torque DI7
command
Mode switch between
T-P 0x20 torque and position DI7
command
Reserved 0x2C Reserved
Reserved 0x2D Reserved
EMGS 0x21 Emergency stop DI8 DI8 DI8 DI8 DI8 DI8 DI8 DI8
NL(CWL) 0x22 Reverse inhibit limit DI6 DI6 DI6 DI6 DI6
PL(CCWL) 0x23 Forward inhibit limit DI7 DI7 DI7 DI7 DI7
Reverse operation
TLLM 0x25
torque limit

DI
Symbol Function PT S T Sz Tz PT-S PT-T S-T
Code
Forward operation
TRLM 0x26
torque limit
JOGU 0x37 Forward JOG input
JOGD 0x38 Reverse JOG input
Electronic gear ratio
GNUM0 0x43 (Numerator) selection
0
Electronic gear ratio
GNUM1 0x44 (Numerator) selection
1
INHP 0x45 Pulse inhibit input
NOTE
1) For corresponding pin of DI1~DI8, please refer to section 3.3.1.
Table 3.2 Default Value of DO Function

DO
Signal Function PT S T Sz Tz PT-S PT-T S-T
Code
SRDY 0x01 Servo ready DO1 DO1 DO1 DO1 DO1 DO1 DO1 DO1
SON 0x02 Servo On
ZSPD 0x03 Zero-speed reached DO2 DO2 DO2 DO2 DO2 DO2 DO2 DO2
Reach the target
TSPD 0x04 DO3 DO3 DO3 DO3 DO3 DO3 DO3
speed
Reach the target
TPOS 0x05 DO4 DO4 DO4
position
TQL 0x06 Torque limit
ALRM 0x07 Servo alarm DO5 DO5 DO5 DO5 DO5 DO5 DO5 DO5
BRKR 0x08 Brake DO4 DO4 DO4 DO4
Early warning for
OLW 0x10
overload
WARN 0x11 Servo warning
Reverse software
SNL(SCWL) 0x13
limit
Forward software
SPL(SCCWL) 0x14
limit
SP_OK 0x19 Target speed

DO
Signal Function PT S T Sz Tz PT-S PT-T S-T
Code
reached
NOTE
1) For corresponding pin DO1~DO6, please refer to section 3.3.1.

3.3.3 Wiring Diagrams (CN1)

The valid voltage range of analog input command in speed and torque mode is -10V
~+10V. The command value can be set via relevant parameters.
C1: Speed / Torque analog signal input
C2: Analog monitor output (MON1, MON2)

Pulse command can be input by the way of open-collector or Line driver. The
maximum input pulse of Line driver is 500 kpps and 200 kpps for open-collector.
C3-1: The source of pulse input is open-collector NPN equipment which applies the
internal power of the servo drive.
C3-2: The source of pulse input is open-collector PNP equipment which applies the
internal power of the servo drive.

C3-3: The source of pulse input is open-collector NPN equipment which applies the
external power of the servo drive.
C3-4: The source of pulse input is open-collector PNP equipment which applies the
external power of the servo drive.
Caution: Do not apply to dual power or it may damage the servo drive.

C4-1: Pulse input (Line driver) can only apply to 5V power. Never apply to 24V power.
C4-2: High-speed pulse input (Line driver) can only apply to 5V power. Never apply to 24V power.

The high-speed pulse input interface of the servo drive is not the
isolated interface. In order to reduce the interference of the noise, it is
suggested that the terminal ground of the controller and the servo drive
should be connected to each other.
When the drive connects to inductive load, the diode has to be installed. (The
permissible current is under 40mA. The surge current is under 100mA.)
C5: Wiring of DO signal. The servo drive applies C6: Wiring of DO signal. The servo drive applies
to the internal power and the resistor is to the internal power and the resistor is
general load. inductive load.
Servo Drive
Ensure the polarity (+, -) of

DC24V Diode is correct or it may
damage the drive.
VDD
DOX(DOX+,DOX-)
17
X=1,2,3,4,5,6
DO1(7,6)
DO2(5,4)
DO3(3,2) DOX+
DO4(1,26)
DO5(28,27)
DO6(16,15) DOX-
COM-
14
C7: Wiring of DO signal. The servo drive applies C8: Wiring of DO signal. The servo drive applies
to the external power and the resistor is to the external power and the resistor is
general load. inductive load.

Input signal via relay or open-collector transistor

NPN transistor, common emitter (E) mode (SINK mode)
C9: Wiring of DI signal. The servo drive applies to C10: Wiring of DI signal. The servo drive
the internal power. applies to the external power.
PNP transistor, common emitter (E) mode (SOURCE mode)

C11: Wiring of DI signal. The servo drive applies C12: Wiring of DI signal. The servo drive applies
to the internal power. to the external power.
Caution: Do not apply to dual power or it may damage the servo drive.

C13: Encoder signal output (Line driver) C14: Encoder signal output (Opto-isolator)
C15: Encoder OCZ output (Open-collector Z-pulse output)
24V
Servo Drive
Max. Spec: 30V
100mA
OCZ 44
GND 29

3.3.4 DI and DO Signal Specified by Users

If the default setting of DI/DO signal cannot satisfy the need, self-set the DI/DO signal
will do and easy. The signal function of DI1 ~ 9 and DO1 ~ 6 is determined by
parameter P2-10 ~ P2-17, P2-36 and parameter P2-18 ~ P2-22, P2-37 respectively.
Please refer to Chapter 7.2, which shown as the following table. Enter DI or DO code
in the corresponding parameter to setup DI/DO.
Signal Name Pin No. Parameter Signal Name Pin No. Parameter
DI1- CN1-9 P2-10 DO1+ CN1-7
P2-18
DI2- CN1-10 P2-11 DO1- CN1-6
DI3- CN1-34 P2-12 DO2+ CN1-5
P2-19
DI4- CN1-8 P2-13 DO2- CN1-4
DI DI5- CN1-33 P2-14 DO3+ CN1-3
P2-20
DI6- CN1-32 P2-15 DO3- CN1-2
DO
DI7- CN1-31 P2-16 DO4+ CN1-1
P2-21
DI8- CN1-30 P2-17 DO4- CN1-26
DI9 CN1-12 P2-36 DO5+ CN1-28
P2-22
DO5- CN1-27
DO6+ CN1-16
P2-37
DO6- CN1-15

3.4 CN2 Connector

There are two types of CN2 encoder cable which shown as below:
Encoder
CN2 Connector Connector
CN2 on drive Connect to the servo Connect to the
side drive motor
Quick
Connector
Military
Connector
Definition of two sides:
(1) Encoder Connector
6 7 8 9
View from 1 2 3 4 5
this side Rear view
(2) Motor Connector
1 2 3 3 2 1
Quick 4 5 6 6 5 4
Connector 7 8 9 View from View from 9 8 7
this side this side
HOUSINGAMP (1-172161-9)
Military
Connector
B A M
C N L
P T
D K
R S
E J
F G H
3106A-20-29S

The definition of each signal is as follows:
Drive Connector Encoder Connector

Terminal Military Quick
PIN No. Description Color
Symbol Connector Connector
Serial communication
4 T+ A 1 Blue
signal input / output (+)
Serial communication Blue &
5 T- B 4
signal input / output (-) Black
Red / Red
8 +5V +5V power supply S 7
& White
Black /
7, 6 GND Ground R 8 Black &
White
Shell Shielding Shielding L 9 -
The shielding procedures of CN2 encoder connector are as followings:
(1) Solder the centre cores on the metal part of

the connector adequately for good ground
contact with the plate and shielding.
(2) Trim the ends of the cores and install the

cores with shielding into the plastic case of
the connector as shown in the figure.
(3) Tighten the screws to complete the

shielding.

3.5 Wiring of CN3 Connector

Layout of CN3 Connector
The servo drive connects to the personal computer via communication connector. The
user can operate the servo drive via MODBUS, PLC or HMI. There are two common
communication interfaces, RS-232 and RS-485. Among them, RS-232 is more
common. Its communication distance is about 15 meter. If the user selects RS-485, its
transmission distance is longer and supports more than one servo drives for
connection.
CN3 Port (Female)
Side View Please read carefully the following note. Improper wiring may
Rear View cause damage or injury!
PIN No. Signal Name Terminal Symbol Function and Description
1 Grounding GND + 5 V connects to the signal terminal

The drive transmits the data
RS-232 data
2 RS-232_TX The connector connects to RS-232 of
transmission
PC
3 - - Reserved
The drive receives the data
RS-232 data
4 RS-232_RX The connector connects to RS-232 of
receiving
PC
RS-485 data The drive transmits the date to
5 RS-485(+) differential terminal (+)
transmission
RS-485 data The drive transmits the date to
6 RS-485(-) differential terminal (-)
transmission
NOTE
1) Please refer to section 8.1 for RS-485 wiring.
2) Two kinds of communication wire of IEEE1394 are commercially available. One of
the internal ground terminals (Pin 1) will short circuit with the shielding and will
damage the drive. Do not connect GND to the shielding.

3.6 Analog Monitor Output Connector - CN5

Analog Monitor Output Connector CN5 is used to monitor the motor operation status.
Motor characteristics such as speed and current can be represented by analog voltages.
The drive provides two channels which can be configured with the parameter P0-03 to
output the desired characteristics. Output voltage is reference to the power ground (GND).
CN5 Terminal Layout and Identification
Signal Cable for CN5 Connector
Wiring
Function and
PIN No. Signal Symbol Color Diagram
Description
(Refer to 3.3.3)
1 MON1 Monitor analog data 1 Red
2 GND Ground White C2
3 MON2 Monitor analog data 2 Black

3.7 Standard Connection Example

3.7.1 Position (PT) Control Mode
Servo Drive
MCCB ASDA-B2 series
MC
AC 200/230 V R 4
P
Three-phase S Regenerative
50/60Hz D resistor
T
C
Red
U
L1c White Power supply
V
L2c Black
W
CN1 Green
24V EMGS BRKR Brake
5
/SIGN 37
CN2 Encoder
Pulse input
SIGN 39
4 T+ Blue
(Line Driver)1 /PULSE 41 Blue&
10K 5 T- Black
PULSE 43
Reserved - -
10V 10K T-REF 18
10K Reserved - -
GND 19 Red/Red& SG Twisted-pair of
8 +5V White twisted-shield
/HSIGN 40 cable
6,7 GND
Black/Black
&White
High-speed HSIGN 42
CN3
pulse input 2 /HPULSE 36
(Line Receiver) DC 24V 6 RS485-
HPULSE 38
5 RS485+
VDD 17
4 RS232_RX
COM+ 11
3 -
COM- 14 3
2 RS232_TX
SON DI1 9 5 K
1 GND
CCLR DI2 10 5 K
5 K
TCM0 DI3 34 CN5
5 K
TCM1 DI4 8 1 MON1
5 K 10K Twisted-pair of
ARST DI5 33 2 GND twisted-shield
5 K 10K cable
CWL DI6 32 3 MON2
5 K
CCWL DI7 31 SG
5 K
EMGS DI8 30
5 K
0 DI9 12
DO1+ 7
SRDY
1.5K
DO1- 6
DO2+ 5
ZSPD
1.5K
24V DO2- 4
DO3+ 3
1.5K
DO3- 2
DO4+ 1
TPOS
1.5K
DO4- 26
ALRM
DO5+ 28
1.5K
DO5- 27
DO6+ 16
0
1.5K
DO6- 15
A phase OA 21
differential signal /OA 22
B phase OB 25
differential signal /OB 23
Encoder Please note:
pulse OZ 13
input
Z phase
differential signal /OZ 24
*1 Please refer to C3 ~ C4 wiring
diagrams in section 3.3.3.
Z phase signal OCZ 44 *2 Please refer to C3 ~ C4 wiring
(open-collector) GND 19 diagrams in section 3.3.3.
Max. output current 3A *3 Please refer to C9 ~ C12 wiring
Voltage 50V
diagrams (SINK / SOURCE mode) in
section 3.3.3.
*4 Model that under 200W has no built-
in regenerative resistor.
*5 The brake coil has no polarity.

3.7.2 Speed Control Mode
Servo Drive
MCCB ASDA-B2 series
MC
AC 200/230 V R 2
P
Three-phase S Regenerative
50/60Hz D resistor
T
C
Red
U
L1c White Power supply
V
L2c Black
10K W
CN1 Green 24V EMGS BRKR Brake
3
10V 10K V_REF
/SIGN 20
10K CN2 Encoder
GND
SIGN 19
10K 4 T+ Blue
Blue&
5 T- Black
10V 10K T_REF 18 10K Reserved - -
GND 19
Reserved - -
Twisted-pair or
8 Red/Red& SG
+5V White twisted-shield
cable
6,7 GND
Black/Black
&White
CN3
DC 24V 6 RS485-
5 RS485+
VDD 17
4 RS232_RX
COM+ 11
3 -
COM- 14 *1
2 RS232_TX
SON DI1 9 5 K
1 GND
TRQLM DI2 10 5 K
5 K
SPD0 DI3 34 CN5
5 K
SPD1 DI4 8 1 MON1
5 K 10K Twisted-pair or
ARST DI5 33 2 GND twisted-shield
5 K 10K cable
CWL DI6 32 3 MON2
5 K
CCWL DI7 31 SG
5 K
EMGS DI8 30
5 K
0 DI9 12
DO1+ 7
SRDY
1.5K
DO1- 6
DO2+ 5
ZSPD
1.5K
24V DO2- 4
DO3+ 3
TSPD
1.5K
DO3- 2
DO4+ 1
BRKR
1.5K
DO4- 26
ALRM
DO5+ 28
1.5K
DO5- 27
DO6+ 16
0
1.5K
DO6- 15
A phase OA 21
differential signal /OA 22
B phase OB 25
differential signal
/OB 23
Encoder
pulse Z phase OZ 13
output differential signal
/OZ 24
Please note:
Z phase signal OCZ 44 *1 Please refer to C9 ~ C12 wiring
(open-collector) GND 19 diagrams (SINK / SOURCE mode)
Max. output current 3A in section 3.3.3.
Voltage 50V
*2 The servo drive provides built-in
regenerative resistor.

3.7.3 Torque Control Mode
Please note:
*1 Please refer to C9 ~ C12 wiring
diagrams (SINK / SOURCE mode)
in section 3.3.3.
*2 The servo drive provides built-in
regenerative resistor.

Chapter 4 Panel Display and
Operation
This chapter details the panel status and operation of ADSA-B2 series servo drive.
4.1 Panel Description
Name Function
Five-/Seven-segment display is for displaying the monitoring values,
Display
parameter values and setting values.
Charge LED The Charge LED lights to indicate the power is applied to the circuit.
MODE Key. Pressing MODE key can enter or exit different parameter
MODE Key groups, and switch among Monitor mode, Parameter mode and Alarm
Mode.
SHIFT Key. Pressing SHIFT key can scrolls through parameter groups.
After a parameter is selected and its value displayed, pressing SHIFT
SHIFT Key
key can move the cursor to the left and then change parameter settings
(blinking digits) by using arrow keys.
UP and DOWN arrow Key. Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow key can
UP and DOWN
scroll through and change monitor codes, parameter groups and various
Key
parameter settings.
SET Key. Pressing the SET key can display and save the parameter
groups, the various parameter settings. In monitor mode, pressing SET
SET Key
key can switch decimal or hexadecimal display. In parameter mode,
pressing SET key can enter into parameter setting mode.

Chapter 4 Panel Display and Operation ASDA-B2
4.2 Parameter Setting Procedure
(1) When the servo drive connects to the power, the display will show the monitor variable
for about one second, and then enter into the Monitor Mode.
(2) Press the MODE Key can switch mode from Parameter Mode Monitor Mode
Alarm Mode. If no alarm occurs, then the Alarm Mode will be skipped.
(3) When new alarm occurs, it will switch to Alarm Display Mode in any conditions.
Pressing the MODE Key can switch to the other modes. If there is no Key to be
selected for 20 seconds, it will return to the Alarm Mode automatically.
(4) In Monitor Mode, press UP or DOWN Key can switch the monitor variable. The monitor
variable will be displayed for a second.
(5) In Parameter Mode, pressing the SHIFT Key can switch the group code. The
UP/DOWN Key can change parameter code of two bytes.
(6) In Parameter Mode, press the SET Key, the system will immediately enter into Editing
Setting Mode. The display will show the corresponded setting value of the parameter.
The UP/DOWN Key can be used to change the parameter value or press the MODE
Key to skip Editing Setting Mode and return to Parameter Mode.
(7) In Editing Setting Mode, pressing the SHIFT Key can move the blinking bit to the left.
And use the UP/DOWN Key to adjust the higher setting byte value.
(8) After adjusting the setting value, press the SET Key. It can save the parameter or
execute the command.
(9) After finish parameter setting, the display will show the end code SAVEDand
return to the Parameter Mode automatically.

ASDA-B2 Chapter 4 Panel Display and Operation
4.3 Status Display

4.3.1 Save Setting Display
When finishing editing parameter, press the SET Key to save the setting. The panel
will display the setting status according to the setting for a second.
Display Symbol Description
The setting value is saved correctly. (Saved)
Read-only parameter. Write-protected. (Read-Only)
Enter the wrong password or no password has been

entered. (Locked)
Incorrect setting value or enter the reserved setting
value. (Out of Range)
No entering is allowed when it is Servo ON. (Servo On)
Parameter will be effective after the servo drive is re-

powered on. (Power On)
4.3.2 Decimal Point

High byte / low byte indication: When the data is
displayed in decimal 32 bits, it is for indicating the current
high or low byte.
Negative sign: When the data is displayed in decimal
format, the two decimal points in the left represents the
negative sign, no matter it is showed in 16 or 32 bits.
When it is showed in hexadecimal format, it only shows
positive sign.
4.3.3 Alarm Message

When there is an error of the drive, it will show AL as
the alarm sign and nnn as the alarm code.
For further explanation, please refer to Chapter 7, P0-
01, parameter description, or Chapter 9,
Troubleshooting.

4.3.4 Positive and Negative Sign Setting

When entering into the Editing Setting Mode, pressing
UP / DOWN Key can increase or decrease the displayed
content. The SHIFT Key can change the desired
adjusted carry value. (The carry value is blinking at the
moment.)
Pressing the SHIFT Key for two seconds can switch the
positive (+) and negative (-) sign. If the parameter is over
the range after switching the positive or negative sign,
then it cannot be switched.
4.3.5 Monitor Display

When the drive is applied to the power, the display will show the monitor displayed
symbol for a second, and then enter into the Monitor Mode. In Monitor Mode, the UP /
DOWN Key can change the desired monitor variable. Or, the user can directly change
parameter P0-02 to set the monitor code. When the power is applied, it will display
ASDB2 first. When the value of P0-02 is 4, it will display the pulse number of pulse
command.
P0-02 Monitor Displayed
Description Unit
Setting Symbol
Motor feedback pulse number
0 (after the scaling of electronic gear [user unit]
ratio) (User unit)
Input pulse number of pulse
1 command (after the scaling of [user unit]
electronic gear ratio) (User unit)
The difference of error pulse
number between control command
2 [user unit]
pulse and feedback pulse number
(User unit)
Motor feedback pulse number
3 [pulse]
(encoder unit, 1600000 pulse/rev)
Input pulse number of pulse
4 command (before the scaling of [pulse]
electronic gear ratio) (encoder unit)
Error pulse number (after the
5 scaling of electronic gear ratio) [pulse]
(encoder unit)
6 Input frequency of pulse command [Kpps]
7 Motor speed [r/min]

P0-02 Monitor Displayed

Description Unit
Setting Symbol
8 Speed input command [Volt]
9 Speed input command [r/min]
10 Torque input command [Volt]
11 Torque input command [%]
12 Average load [%]
13 Peak load [%]
14 Main circuit voltage [Volt]
Load / Motor Inertia Ratio

15 (Please note that if the display is [0.1times]
130, it indicates that the actual
inertia is 13.0)
o
16 IGBT temperature [ C]
Resonance frequency (Low byte is
17 the first resonance and high byte [Hz]
is the second one)
The absolute pulse number of
encoder Z phase equals to the
18 homing value, 0. It will be +5000 -
or -5000 pulse when rotating in
forward or reverse direction.
The following table lists the display examples of monitor value:

Example of the Status Description
Displayed Value
If the value is 1234, it displays 01234 (shows
(Dec.) in decimal format).
16-bit If the value is 0x1234, it displays 1234 (shows
(Hex.) in hexadecimal format; the first digit does not
show any).
(Dec. High) If the value is 1234567890, the display of the

high byte is 1234.5 and displays 67890 as the
(Dec. Low) low byte (shows in decimal format).
32-bit
(Hex. High) If the value is 0x12345678, the display of the
high byte is h1234 and displays L5678 as the
(Hex. Low) low byte (shows in hexadecimal format).

Negative display. If the value is -12345, it displays

1.2.345 (only shows in decimal format; there is no
positive or negative sign for hexadecimal format
display).
NOTE
1) Dec means it is displayed in decimal format. Hex means it is displayed in hexadecimal

format.
2) The above display methods can be applied in Monitor Mode and Editing Setting Mode.
3) When all monitor variables is 32 bits, high / low bit and the display (Dec/Hex) can be
switched. According to the definition in Chapter 7, each parameter only supports one
displaying method and cannot be switched.

4.4 General Function

4.4.1 Operation of Fault Cord Display
When it is in Parameter Mode, select P4-00~P4-04 and press the SET Key, the
corresponding fault record will be shown.

4.4.2 JOG Mode

When it is in Parameter Mode, select P4-05 and follow the setting method below for
JOG operation.
(1) Press the SET Key to display the speed value of JOG. The default value is
20r/min.
(2) Press UP or DOWN Key to adjust the desired speed value of JOG. It is adjusted
to 100r/min in the example.
(3) Press the SET Key to display JOG and enter JOG mode.
(4) When it is in JOG Mode, press UP or DOWN Key to enable the servo motor in
forward or reverse direction. The servo motor stops running as soon as the user
stops pressing the key. JOG operation is working only when it is Servo ON.

4.4.3 Force DO Output

Enter into the Output Diagnosis Mode by the following settings. Set P2-08 to 406 and
enable the function of force DO output. Then, set the force DO output by binary
method via P4-06. When the setting value is 2, DO2 will be forced to enable. When the
setting value is 5, DO1 and DO3 will be forced to enable. No data is retained in this
mode. It returns to the normal DO mode when re-power on the drive or set P2-08 to
400.
NOTE
P4-06 is displayed in hexadecimal format. Therefore, it will not show the fifth 0.

4.4.4 Digital Input Diagnosis Operation

Enter into the Digital Input Diagnosis Mode by the following setting methods. When the
external output signal DI1~DI9 is ON, the corresponding signal will be shown on the
panel. It is displayed by bit. When it shows bit, it means it is ON.
For example, if it shows 1E1, E is in hexadecimal format, it will be 1100 when it

transfers to binary format. Then, DI6~DI8 is ON.
(Hexadecimal Display)

4.4.5 Digital Output Diagnosis Operation

Enter into the Digital Output Diagnosis Mode by the following setting methods. The
output signal DO1~DO6 is ON and the corresponding signal will be shown on the
panel. It is displayed by bit. When it shows bit, it means it is ON.
For example, if it shows 3F, F is in hexadecimal format, it will be 1111 when it transfers
to binary format. Then, DO1~DO4 is ON.
(Display in hexadecimal format)


Chapter 5 Trial Operation and
Tuning
This chapter is divided into two parts to describe the trial operation. The first one is the
inspection without load and another one is the inspection with load. For safety reasons,
please conduct the first inspection.
5.1 Inspection without Load

Please remove the load of the servo motor, including coupling on the shaft and
accessories so as to avoid any damage on servo drive or mechanism. This is aiming to
avoid the falling off of the disassembled parts of the motor shaft and indirectly causing the
personnel injury or equipment damage during operation. Running the motor without load, if
the servo motor can run during normal operation, then it can connect to load for operation.
Caution: Please operate the servo motor without load first. If the servo motor runs
normally, connect the load afterwards in order to avoid any danger.
Please check the following items before operation.

Check if there is any obvious damage shown on its appearance.
The splicing parts of the wiring terminal should be isolated.
Make sure the wiring is correct so as to avoid the damage or
any abnormity.
Check if the electric conductivity objects including sheet metal
(such as screws) or inflammable objects are not inside the
servo drive.
Inspection before Check if the control switch is in OFF status.
operation Do not place the servo drive or external regenerative resistor on
(has not applied to inflammable objects.
the power yet) To avoid the electromagnetic brake losing efficacy, please
check if stop function and circuit break function can work
normally.
If the peripheral devices are interfered by the electronic
instruments, please reduce electromagnetic interference with
devices.
Please make sure the external voltage level of the servo drive is
correct.
The encoder cable should avoid excessive stress. When the
Inspection before
motor is running, make sure the cable is not frayed or over
running the servo
extended.
drive
Please contact with Delta if there is any vibration of the servo

Chapter 5 Trial Operation and Tuning ASDA-B2
(has already applied motor or unusual noise during the operation.

to the power) Make sure the setting of the parameters is correct. Different
machinery has different characteristic, please adjust the
parameter according to the characteristic of each machinery.
Please reset the parameter when the servo drive is in SERVO
OFF status, or it may cause malfunction.
When the relay is operating, make sure it can work properly.
Check if the power indicator and LED display works normally.
PWM is used to control 7.5 kW. Thus, when the temperature is
lower than 40, the fan does not work.

ASDA-B2 Chapter 5 Trial Operation and Tuning
5.2 Applying Power to the Servo Drive

Please follow the instructions below.
A. Make sure the wiring between the motor and servo drive is correct.
U, V, W and FG have to connect to cable red, white, black and green respectively. If
the wiring is incorrect, the motor cannot work normally. The ground wire FG of the
motor must be connected to the ground terminal of the servo drive. Please refer to
Chapter 3.1 for wiring.
The encoder cable of the motor has correctly connected to CN2: If users only desire to
execute JOG function, it is unnecessary to connect CN1 and CN3 (Please refer to
Chapter 5.3). Refer to Chapter 3.1 and 3.4 for the wiring of CN2.
Caution: Do not connect the power terminal (R, S, T) to the output terminal (U, V, W) of
the servo drive. Or it might damage the servo drive.
B. Power circuit of the servo drive

Apply power to the servo drive. Please refer to Chapter 3.1.3 for power wiring.
C. Power On
Power of the servo drive: including control circuit (L1c, L2c) and main circuit (R, S, T)
power. When the power is on, the display of the servo drive will be:
The digital input (DI6~DI8) of the default value is the signal of reverse limit error (NL),
forward limit error (PL) and emergency stop (EMGS), if not using the default setting of
DI6~DI8, adjusting the setting of P2-15~P2-17 is a must. Parameters could be set to 0
(disable this DI function) or modified to another function.
From the last setting, the servo drive status displays parameter P0-02 setting as the
motor speed (06), then the screen display will be:
If the screen displays no text, please check if the voltage of the control circuit terminal
(L1c and L2c) is over low.
1) When the screen displays:

Warning of overvoltage:
It means the voltage input by the main circuit is higher than the rated voltage or
power input error (incorrect power system).
Corrective actions:
Use the voltmeter to measure if the input voltage from the main circuit is within
the range of rated voltage value.
Use the voltmeter to measure if the power system complies with the
specification.
Warning of encoder error:

Check if the motor encoder is securely connected or the wiring is correct.
Corrective actions:
Check if the wiring is the same as the instruction of the user manual.
Check the encoder connector.
Check if the wiring is loose.
Encoder is damaged.
Warning of emergency stop:

Please check if any of the digital input DI1~DI9 is set to emergency stop (EMGS).
Corrective actions:
If not desire to set emergency stop (EMGS) as one of the digital input, make
sure no digital input is set to emergency stop (EMGS) among DI1~DI9. (That is
to say none of the parameters, P2-10~P2-17 and P2-36 is set to 21.)
If the function of emergency stop (EMGS) is needed and this DI is set as
normally close (function code: 0x0021), please make sure this DI is always
normally close. If not, please set this DI as normally open (function code:
0x0121).

Warning of negative limit error:

Please check if any of the digital input DI1~DI9 is set to negative limit (NL) and that
DI is ON.
Corrective actions:
If not desire to set negative limit (NL) as one of the digital input, make sure no
digital input is set to negative limit (NL) among DI1~DI9. (That is to say none of
the parameters, P2-10~P2-17 and P2-36 is set to 22.)
If the function of negative limit (NL) is needed and this DI is set as normally
close (function code: 0x0022), please make sure this DI is always normally
close. If not, please set this DI as normally open (function code: 0x0122).
Warning of positive limit error:

Please check if any of the digital input DI1~DI9 is set positive limit (PL) and that DI
is ON.
Corrective actions:
If not desire to set positive limit (PL) as one of the digital input, make sure no
digital input is set to positive limit (PL) among DI1~DI9. (That is to say none of
the parameters, P2-10~P2-17 and P2-36 is set to 23.)
If the function of positive limit (PL) is needed and this DI is set as normally
close (function code: 0x0023), please make sure this DI is always normally
close. If not, please set this DI as normally open (function code: 0x0123).
Warning of over current:

Corrective actions:
Check the connection between the motor and servo drive.
Check if the conducting wire is short circuited.
Exclude short circuit and avoid metal conductors being exposed.
Warning of under voltage:

Corrective actions:
Check if the wiring of main circuit input voltage is correct.
Use voltmeter to measure if the main circuit voltage is normal.
Use voltmeter to measure if the power system complies with the specification.

Note: During the process of power on or servo on, if an alarm occurs or shows any
abnormal display, please contact the distributors.

5.3 JOG Trial Run without Load

It is very convenient to test the motor and servo drive with the method of JOG trial run
without load since the extra wiring is unnecessary. For safety reasons, it is recommended
to set JOG at low speed. Please see the following descriptions.
STEP 1: Use software setting to Servo ON. Set parameter P2-30 to 1. This setting is to
force the servo ON through software.
STEP 2: Set P4-05 as JOG speed (Unit: [r/min]). After setting the desired JOG speed,
press the SET Key, the servo drive will enter JOG mode.
STEP 3: Press the MODE Key to exist JOG mode.

5.4 Trial Run without Load (Speed Mode)

Before the trial run without load, firmly secure the motor base so as to avoid the danger
cause by the reaction of motor operation.
STEP 1:
Set the control mode of the servo drive to speed mode. Set P1-01 to 2. Then, re-power on
the servo drive.
STEP 2:
In speed control mode, the digital input settings of trial run are as follows:
Parameter
Digital Input Symbol Function Description CN1 PIN No.
Setting Value
DI1 P2-10=101 SON Servo On DI1-=9
DI2 P2-11=109 TRQLM Torque limit DI2-=10
DI3 P2-12=114 SPD0 Speed command selection DI3-=34
DI4 P2-13=115 SPD1 Speed command selection DI4-=8
DI5 P2-14=102 ARST Alarm reset DI5-=33
DI6 P2-15=0 Disabled Invalid DI function -
The above table disables the function of negative limit (DI6), positive limit (DI7) and
emergency stop (DI8). Thus, the value of parameter P2-15 ~ P2-17 and P2-36 is set to 0
(Disabled). The digital input of Deltas servo drive can be programmed by users. When
programming digital input, please refer to the description of DI code.
The default setting includes the function of negative limit, positive limit and emergency
stop, therefore, after the setting is completed, if there is any alarm occurs, please re-power
on the servo drive or switch ON DI5 to clear the alarm. Please refer to Chapter 5.2.

The speed command selection is determined by SPD0 and SPD1. See the table below.
Speed DI signal of CN1

Command Source Content Range
Command No.
SPD1 SPD0
External analog Voltage between V- -10V ~ +10V
S1 0 0
command REF and GND
S2 0 1 P1-09 -50000 ~ 50000
S3 1 0 Register parameter P1-10 -50000 ~ 50000
S4 1 1 P1-11 -50000 ~ 50000
0: means DI is OFF; 1: means DI is ON

Register parameter
The parameter setting range is from -50000 to 50000.
Setting speed = Setting value x unit (0.1 r/min).
For example: P1-09 = +30000; Setting speed = +30000 x 0.1r/min = +3000r/min
Command setting of speed register
P1-09 is set to 30000 Input command Rotation direction

P1-10 is set to 1000 + CW
P1-11 is set to -30000 - CCW
STEP 3:
(1) Users switch ON DI1 and Servo ON.
(2) Both DI3 (SPD0) and DI4 (SPD1), the speed command, are OFF, which means it
currently executes S1 command. The motor rotates according to analog voltage
command.
(3) When DI3 (SPD0) is ON, it means it currently executes S2 command (3000r/min).
The speed is 3000r/min at the moment.
(4) When DI4 (SPD1) is ON, it means it currently executes S3 command (100r/min). The
speed is 100r/min.
(5) When both DI3 (SPD0) and DI4 (SPD1) are ON, it means S4 command (-3000r/min)
is executed at the moment. The speed is -3000r/min.
(6) Step (3), (4) and (5) can be repeatedly executed.
(7) If users desire to stop the motor, switch OFF DI1 (Servo OFF).

5.5 Tuning Procedure

Estimate the ratio of Load Inertia to Servo Motor Inertia: JOG Mode
Tuning Procedure Display
1. After completing wiring, when applying to the power, the servo
drive will display:
2. Press the MODE Key to select the mode of parameter function.
3. Press the SHIFT Key twice to select the mode of parameter group.
4. Press the UP Key to select parameter P2-17.
5. Press the SET Key to display parameter value, which is shown as

the content on the right.
6. Press the SHIFT Key twice, then press the UP Key and then press
the SET Key.
7. Press the UP Key to select parameter P2-30.
8. Press the SET Key to display the parameter value.
9. Press the UP Key and select the parameter value 1.
10. Then, the servo drive is ON and will show:
11. Press the MODE Key and then press the DOWN Key for three
times to select the value of inertia ratio.
12. The panel displays the current value of inertia ratio (default value).
13. Press the MODE Key to select the mode of parameter function.
14. Press the SHIFT Key twice to select the mode of parameter group.
15. Press the UP Key twice to select parameter P4-05.
16. Press the SET Key to show the content, which is 20r/min at JOG
speed. Press the UP or DOWN Key to increase or decrease the
JOG speed. Press the SHIFT Key to move to the next digit of the
left.
17. Set the desired JOG speed and press the SET Key which is shown
as the figure on the right.
18. Press the UP Key to rotate the motor in forward direction while press the DOWN Key
the motor will rotate in reverse direction.
19. Execute JOG operation at low speed first. With the constant speed, if the motor
operates smoothly in forward and reverse direction, users can execute JOG operation
at higher speed.

Tuning Procedure Display

20. In P4-05, the servo drive cannot display inertia ratio. Please press the MODE Key
twice to view the value of inertia ratio. If users desire to execute JOG operation again,
press the MODE Key, and then press the SET Key twice. Observe the panel display
to see if the load inertia ratio remains at the same value after acceleration and
deceleration.
5.5.1 Flowchart of Tuning Procedure

5.5.2 Inertia Estimation Flowchart (with Mechanism)
Turn Off the power of servo drive.
Connect the motor to the

mechanism.
Turn On the power of servo drive.
Set P0-02 to 15. The panel will

display inertia ratio.
Set P2-32 to 0 in manual mode.
Set P2-30 to 1.
No
Decrease the value of P2-00. Set Yes Mechanical
the value of P2-06 and P2-00 to system
the same. vibrates?
Enter P4-05, JOG mode.
Set JOG speed at 20r/min.
Press the Up (forward) or Down

(reverse) key to perform JOG.
If it operates No Check the

smoothly at
constant speed?
mechanism.
Yes
Increase JOG speed which is

>200r/min.
Alternately accelerate and

decelerate the mechanical
system.
View the panel display to see if the inertia ratio remains the same after
alternately accelerate and decelerate. Then, select the tuning method
according to the inertia ratio.
Note: Users cannot view inertia ratio in JOG mode. Please press the
MODE Key twice. If users desire to perform JOG operation, press the
MODE Key, and then press the SET Key twice.

5.5.3 Flowchart of Auto Tuning

Set P2-32 to 1 (auto mode, continuous tuning)
Continue to estimate the system inertia. Automatically save the value in P1-37 every
30 minutes and refer the stiffness and bandwidth setting of P2-31.
P2-31Stiffness setting in auto tuning mode (The default value is 80)

In auto and semi-auto mode, the bandwidth setting of speed circuit is:
1~50Hz: low-stiffness, low-response
51~250Hz: medium-stiffness, medium-response
251~850Hz: high-stiffness, high-response
Stiffness setting in auto tuning mode: the bigger the value is, the stronger the stiffness
will be.
Adjust the value of P2-31: Increase the value of P2-31 to increase stiffness or
decrease to reduce the noise. Continue to tune until the performance is satisfied. Then,
tuning is completed.

5.5.4 Flowchart of Semi-Auto Tuning

Set P2-32 to 2 (semi-auto mode, non-continuous tuning)
After tuning for a while and wait until the system inertia is stable, it stops estimating.
The estimated inertia ratio will be saved to P1-37. When switching mode from manual
or auto to semi auto, the system starts tuning again. During the process of estimation,
the system will refer the stiffness and bandwidth setting of P2-31.
P2-31Response setting in auto mode (The default value is 80)
In auto and semi-auto mode, the bandwidth setting of speed circuit is:
1~50Hz: low-stiffness, low-response
51~250Hz: medium-stiffness, medium-response
251~850Hz: high-stiffness, high-response
Response setting in semi-auto tuning mode: the bigger the value is, the better the
response will be.
Adjust the value of P2-31: Increase the value of P2-31 to increase the response or
decrease to reduce the noise. Continue to tune until the performance is satisfied. Then,
tuning is completed.
NOTE
1) When bit0 of P2-33 is set to 1, it means the inertia estimation in semi-auto mode is
completed. The result can be accessed by P1-37.
2) If the value of P2-33 bit 0 is cleared to 0, the system will start to estimate again.

5.5.5 Limit of Inertia Ratio

Acceleration / Deceleration time of reaching 2000r/min should be less than 1 second.
The speed in forward and reverse direction should be higher than 200r/min.
The load inertia should be under 100 times of motor inertia.
The change of external force of inertia ratio cannot be too severe.
In auto mode, the inertia value will be saved to P1-37 every 30 minutes; while in semi-
auto mode, the inertia value will be saved to P1-37 only until the system inertia is
stable and stops the estimation of load inertia.

NO
Motor alternately rotates
High-frequency in forward and reverse
resonance? direction.
Motor alternately rotates

in forward and reverse
direction.
YES
High-frequency
YES Set P2-47 to 1.
resonance?
Note 2
Suppress resonance by
P2-44 and P2-46.
NO
NO
NO YES NO
P2-47 is set to 0. Set P2-44 to 32; Repeatedly set
Remains the value of Set P2-46 to 32. P2-47 to 1 for No resonance?
P2-43 and P2-45. Note 1. over 3 times.
YES YES
Set P2-47 to 0.
It is suggested to reduce
the speed bandwidth.
Tuning
completed
NOTE
1) Parameter P2-44 and P2-46 are the setting value of resonance suppression. If the
value has been set to the maximum (32dB), and still cannot suppress the resonance,
please reduce the speed bandwidth. After setting P2-47, users can check the value of
P2-44 and P2-46. If the value of P2-44 is not 0, it means the resonance frequency
exists in the system. Then, users can access P2-43 to see the resonance frequency
(Hz). When there is another resonance frequency, the information will be shown in P2-
43 and P2-44 as well as P2-45 and p2-46.
2) If resonance still exists, repeatedly set P2-47 to 1 for 3 times and manually adjust the
setting of resonance.

5.5.6 Mechanical Resonance Suppression Method

Three groups of Notch filter are provided to suppress mechanical resonance. Two of
them can be set to the auto resonance suppression and manual adjustment.
The procedure of manually suppress the resonance is as the followings:

5.5.7 Tuning Modes and Parameters
Auto-Set Inertia
Tuning Mode P2-32 User-defined Parameter
Parameter Adjustment
P1-37 (Inertia ratio of the motor)
P2-00 (Position control gain)
P2-04 (Speed control gain)
0
P2-06 (Speed integral The value
Manual Mode (Default N/A
compensation) remains
setting)
P2-25 (Low-pass filter of
resonance suppression)
P2-26 (Anti-interference gain)
P1-37
P2-00
P2-02 Continuous
Auto Mode P2-04 P2-31 Frequency response of
tuning (update
(Continuous 1 speed loop setting in auto
P2-06 the inertia every
estimation) mode (response level)
P2-25 30 minutes)
P2-26
P2-49
P1-37
P2-00
Non-continuous
Semi-Auto P2-02 P2-31 Frequency response of tuning (stop
Mode (Non- P2-04 speed loop setting in updating the
2
continuous P2-06 semi-auto mode inertia after
estimation) P2-25 (response level) operating for a
while)
P2-26
P2-49
When switching mode from auto mode 1 to manual mode 0, the value of P1-37, P2-00,
P2-04, P2-06, P2-25, P2-26 and P2-49 will be modified to the one in auto mode.
When switching mode from semi-auto mode 2 to manual mode 0, the value of P1-37,
P2-00, P2-04, P2-06, P2-25, P2-26 and P2-49 will be modified to the one in semi-auto
mode.

5.5.8 Tuning in Manual Mode

The selection of position / speed response frequency should be determined by the
machinary stiffness and application. General speaking, the high-frequency machinary
or the one requries precise processing needs the higher response frequency. However,
it might easily cause the resonance. And the stronger stiffness machinary is needed to
avoid the resonance. When using the unknown resonse frequency machinary, users
could gradually increase the gain setting value to increase the resonse frequency.
Then, decrease the gain setting value until the resonance exists. The followings are
the related descriptions of gain adjustment.:
Position control gain (KPP, parameter P2-00)
This parameter determines the response of position loop. The bigger KPP value
will cause the higher response frequency of position loop. And it will cause better
following error, smaller position error, and shorter settling time. However, if the
value is set too big, the machinery will vibrate or overshoot when positioning. The
calculation of position loop frequency response is as the following:
Speed control gain (KVP, parameter P2-04)
This parameter determines the response of speed loop. The bigger KVP value
will cause the higher response frequency of speed loop and better following error.
However, if the value is set too big, it would easily cause machinery resonance.
The response frequency of speed loop must be 4~6 times higher than the
response frequency of position loop. Otherwise, the machinery might vibrate or
overshoot when positioning. The calculation of speed loop frequency response is
as the following:
JM: Motor Inertia
JL: Load Inertia
P1-37: 0.1 times
When P1-37 (estimation or setting) equals Kthe

VP
real inertia ratio (JL/JM), the real
= Hz
speed loop frequency response will be: 2
Speed integral compensation (KVI, parameter P2-06)
The higher the KVI value is, the better capability of eliminating the deviation will
be. However, if the value is set too big, it might easily cause the vibration of
machinery. It is suggested to set the value as the following:

Low-pass filter of resonance suppression (NLP, parameter P2-25)
The high value of inertia ratio will reduce the frequency response of speed loop.
Therefore, the KVP value must be increased to maintain the response frequency.
During the process of increasing KVP value, it might cause machinary resonance.
Please use this parameter to elimiate the noise of resonance. The bigger the
value is, the better the capability of improving high-frequency noise will be.
However, if the value is set too big, it would cause the unstability of speed loop
and overshoot. It is suggested to set the value as the following:
Anti-interference gain (DST, parameter P2-26)
This parameter is used to strengthen the ability of resisting external force and
gradually eliminate overshoot during acceleration / deceleration. Its default value
is 0. It is suggested not to adjust the value in manual mode, unless it is for fine-
tuning.
Position feed forward gain (PFG, parameter P2-02)
It can reduce the position error and shorten the settling time. However, if the
value is set too big, it might cause overshoot. If the setting of e-gear ratio is
bigger than 10, it might cause the noise as well.

Chapter 6 Control Modes of
Operation
6.1 Selection of Operation Mode

Three basic operation modes are provided in this servo drive, position, speed and torque.
Users can use single mode (only in one-mode control) and dual mode to control. The
following table lists all operation mode and description.
Short Setting
Mode Name Description
Name Code
The servo drive receives position command
Position mode and commands the motor to the target
PT 00 position. The position command is input via
(Terminal input)
terminal block and receives pulse signal.
The servo drive receives speed command
and commands the motor to the target
speed. The speed command can be issued
Speed Mode S 02 by register (3 sets of registers in total) or the
external analog voltage (-10V ~ +10V). DI
signal is used to select the command
source.
Single The servo drive receives speed command
Mode and commands the motor to the target
speed. The speed command is issued by
Speed mode
Sz 04 register (3 sets of registers in total) and
(No analog input)
cannot be issued by the external terminal
block. DI signal is used to select the
command source.
The servo drive receives torque command
and commands the motor to the target
torque. The torque command can be issued
Torque mode T 03 by register (3 sets of registers in total) or the
external analog voltage (-10V ~ +10V). DI
signal is used to select the command
source.

Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation ASDA-B2
Short Setting
Mode Name Description
Name Code
Tz 05 The servo drive receives torque command
and commands the motor to the target torque.
The torque command can be issued by
Single Torque mode
register (3 sets of registers in total) and
mode (No analog input)
cannot be issued by the external terminal
block. DI signal is used to select the
command source.
PT-S 06 Switch the mode of PT and S via DI signal.
PT-T 07 Switch the mode of PT and T via DI signal.
Dual Mode
S-T 0A Switch the mode of S and T via DI signal.
Reserved 0B Reserved
Reserved 0C Reserved
The steps of changing mode:

(1) Switching the servo drive to Servo Off status. Turning SON signal of Digit input to be
off can complete this action.
(2) Using parameter P1-01. (Refer to chapter 7).
(3) After the setting is completed, cut the power off and restart the drive again.
The following sections describe the operation of each control mode, including control
structure, command source and loop gain adjustment, etc.

ASDA-B2 Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation
6.2 Position Mode

The followings describe the related information and settings of position mode.
6.2.1 Position Command in PT Mode

PT, position command is the pulse input from terminal block. There are three types of
pulse and each type has positive/negative logic which can be set in parameter P1-00.
See as the followings.
Address: 0100H
P1-00 PTT External Pulse Input Type
0101H
Operation Related Section:
Panel/Software Communication
Interface: Section 6.2.1
Default: 0x2
Control
PT
Mode:
Unit: -
Range: 0 ~ 1142
Data Size: 16-bit
Display
Hexadecimal
Format:
Settings:
Pulse Type
0: AB phase pulse (4x)
1: Clockwise (CW) and Counterclockwise (CCW) pulse
2: Pulse + symbol
Other settings: reserved

Filter Width
If the received frequency is much higher than the setting, it will be
regarded as the noise and filtered out.
Setting Low-speed Filter Frequency Setting High-speed Filter Frequency

Value (Min. pulse width *note 1) Value (Min. pulse width *note 1)
0 0.83Mpps (600ns) 0 3.33Mpps (150ns)
1 208Kpps (2.4us) 1 0.83Mpps (600ns)
2 104Kpps (4.8us) 2 416Kpps (1.2us)
3 52Kpps (9.6us) 3 208Kpps (2.4us)
4 No Filter Function 4 No Filter Function
If the user uses 2~4MHz input pulse, it is suggested to set the filter value to 4.
Note: When the signal is the high-speed pulse specification of 4 Mpps and the settings
value of the filter is 4, then the pulse will not be filtered.

Logic Type
Pulse
Logic Forward Reverse
Type
AB
phase
pulse
Positive CW +
0
Logic CCW
pulse
Pulse +
Symbol
Pulse
AB TH
phase
T1 T1 T1 T1
pulse Sign
CW +
Negative
1 CCW
Logic
pulse
Pulse
TH
Pulse +
T4 T5 T6 T5 T6 T5 T4
Symbol
Sign
Max. Min. time width

Pulse specification input
frequency T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6
High-
Differential
speed 4Mpps 62.5ns 125ns 250ns 200ns 125ns 125ns
Signal
pulse
Differential
Low- 500Kpps 0.5s 1s 2s 2s 1s 1s
Signal
speed
pulse Open
200Kpps 1.25s 2.5s 5s 5s 2.5s 2.5s
collector

Max. input Voltage Forward

Pulse specification
frequency specification specification
High-speed Differential
4Mpps 5V < 25mA
pulse Signal
Differential
Low-speed 500Kpps 2.8V ~ 3.7V < 25mA
Signal
pulse
Open collector 200Kpps 24V (Max.) < 25mA
The Source of External Pulse:

0: Low-speed optical coupler (CN1 Pin: PULSE, SIGN)
1: High-speed differential (CN1 Pin: HPULSE, HSIGN)
Position pulse can be input from these terminals, /PULSE (41), PULSE (43), HPULSE (38),
/HPULSE (36), /SIGN (37), SIGN (39) and HSIGN (42), /HSIGN (40). It can be an open-
collector circuit or line driver. Please refer to Chapter 3.10.1 for wiring method.
6.2.2 Control Structure of Position Mode

The basic control structure is as the following diagram:

For a better control, the pulse signal should be processed and modified through
position command unit. Structure is shown as the diagram below.
Position Command
Processing Unit
GNUM0, GNUM1
Pulse Signal
1st Numerator (P1-44)
High speed Pulse Type 2nd Numerator (P2-60) Command

Selection Counter rd
Selection
Low speed 3 Numerator (P2-61) P1-01
P1-00
4th Numerator (P2-62)
INHIBIT Denominator (P1-45) Moving

Filter
P1-68
Low-pass
Filter
P1-08
PT mode which is shown in the figure can be selected via P1-01. It can set E-gear
ratio for the proper position resolution. Moreover, either S-curve filter or low-pass filter
can be used to smooth the command. See the description in later parts.
Pulse Command Inhibit Input Function (INHP)

Use DI to select INHP (Refer to P2-10~17, P2-36 and table 7.1 INHP (45)) before
using this function. If not, this function will be unable to use. When DI (INHP) is ON,
the pulse command will be cleared in position control mode and the motor will stop
running.
6.2.3 Electronic Gear Ratio

Related parameters:
Address: 0158H
P1-44 GR1 Electronic Gear Ratio (Numerator) (N1)
0159H
Default: 16
Control
PT
Mode:
Unit: pulse
Range: 1 ~ (226-1)
Data Size: 32-bit

Display
Decimal
Format:
Settings:
Please refer to P2-60~P2-62 for the setting of multiple gear ratio (numerator).
NOTE PT mode, the setting value can be changed when Servo ON.
Address: 015AH
P1-45 GR2 Electronic Gear Ratio (Denominator) (M)
015BH
Default: 10
Control
PT
Mode:
Unit: pulse
Range: 1 ~ (231-1)
Data Size: 32-bit
Display
Decimal
Format:
Settings: If the setting is wrong, the servo motor will easily have sudden
unintended acceleration.
Please follow the rules for setting:
The setting of pulse input:
Pulse Position
input N command N
f2 = f1 x
f1 M f2 M
Range of command pulse input: 150NxM25600 (x=1, 2,

3, 4)
Electronic gear provides simple ratio change of travel distance. The high electronic gear
ratio would cause the position command to be the stepped command. S-curve or low-
pass filter can be used to improve the situation. When electronic gear ratio is set to 1,
the motor will turn one cycle for every 10000PUU. When electronic gear ratio is changed
to 0.5, then every two pulses from the command will be refer to one PUU of motor
encoder.
For example, after setting the electronic gear ratio properly, the moving distance of the
object is 1m/pulse, which is easier to use.

Gear Ratio Moving distance of each pulse

command
Electronic gear is 1 3 1000 3000
m
unapplied. 1 4 2500 10000
Electronic gear is 10000
1m
applied. 3000
6.2.4 Low-pass Filter

Related parameters:
Smooth Constant of Position Command Address: 0110H
P1-08 PFLT
(Low-pass Filter) 0111H
Default: 0
Control
PT
Mode:
Unit: 10ms
Range: 0 ~ 1000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display
Decimal
Format:
Example: 11 = 110 msec
Settings: 0: Disabled
Position
Tar get pos ition
Time (ms)
PF LT
6.2.5 Gain Adjustment of Position Loop

Before setting the position control unit, users have to manually (P2-32) complete the
setting of speed control unit since the speed loop is included in position loop. Then, set
the proportional gain (parameter P2-00) and feed forward gain (parameter P2-02) of
position loop. Users also can use the auto mode to set the gain of speed and position
control unit automatically.
1) Proportional gain: Increase the gain so as to enhance the response bandwidth of
position loop.

2) Feed forward gain: Minimize the deviation of phase delay
The position loop bandwidth cannot exceed the speed loop bandwidth. It is suggested
fv
that fp .
4
fv: response bandwidth of speed loop (Hz).
KPP = 2 fp.
fp: response bandwidth of position loop (Hz).
For example, the desired position bandwidth is 20 Hz KPP = 2 20= 125.
Related parameters:
Address: 0200H
P2-00 KPP Position Loop Gain
0201H
Default: 35
Control
PT
Mode:
Unit: rad/s
Range: 0 ~ 2047
Data Size: 16-bit
Display
Decimal
Format:
Settings: When the value of position loop gain is increased, the position
response can be enhanced and the position error can be
reduced. If the value is set too big, it may easily cause vibration
and noise.
Address: 0204H
P2-02 PFG Position Feed Forward Gain
0205H
Default: 50
Control
PT
Mode:
Unit: %
Range: 0 ~ 100
Data Size: 16-bit
Display
Decimal
Format:

Settings: If the position command is changed smoothly, increasing the gain

value can reduce the position error. If the position command is
not changed smoothly, decreasing the gain value can tackle the
problem of mechanical vibration.
Position Control
Smooth Constant of
Position Feed
Position Feed Forward
Differentiator Forward Gain
Gain
P2-02
P2-03
Position
Position Loop
+ +
Gain Max. Speed Limit
Command + P2-00 P1-55
- Switching Rate of
Position Loop
Gain
P2-01 Gain Switching
P2-27 Speed
Command
+
Position Counter Encoder
When the value of proportional gain, KPP is set too big, the response bandwidth of
position loop will be increased and diminish the phase margin. And the motor rotor
rotates vibrantly in forward and reverse direction at the moment. Thus, KPP has to be
decreased until the rotor stops vibrating. When the external torque interrupts, the over-
low KPP cannot meet the demand of position deviation. In this situation, parameter P2-
02 can effectively reduce the position error.

6.3 Speed Mode

Speed control mode (S or Sz) is applicable in precision speed control, such as CNC
machine tools. This servo drive includes two types of command input, analog and register.
Analog command input can use external voltage to control the motor speed. There are two
methods in register input. One is used before operation. Users set different value of speed
command in three registers, and then use SP0, SP1 of CN1 DI signal for switching.
Another method is to change the value of register by communication. In order to deal with
the problem of non-continuous speed command when switching register, a complete S-
curve program is provided. In close-loop system, this servo drive adopts gain adjustment
and integrated PI controller and two modes (manual and auto) for selection.
Users can set all parameters and all auto or auxiliary function will be disabled in manual
mode. While in auto mode, it provides the function of load inertia estimation and parameter
adjustment. In auto mode, parameters which set by users will be regarded as the default
value.
6.3.1 Selection of Speed Mode

There are two types of speed command source, analog voltage and internal
parameters. The selection is determined by CN1 DI signal. See as the followings.
Speed CN1 DI Signal

Command Source Content Range
Command SPD1 SPD0
External
Voltage between
S analog +/-10 V
V-REF-GND
S1 0 0 Mode signal
Speed
Sz N/A 0
command is 0
-50000 ~
S2 0 1 P1-09
50000
-50000 ~
S3 1 0 Register parameter P1-10
50000
-50000 ~
S4 1 1 P1-11
50000

Status of SPD0 ~ SPD1: 0 means DI OFF, 1 means DI ON.

When both SPD0 and SPD1 are 0, if it is in Sz mode, the command will be 0.
Thus, if there is no need to use analog voltage as the speed command, Sz
mode can be applied to tackle the problem of zero-drift. If it is in S mode, the
command will be the voltage deviation between V-REF and GND. The range of
input voltage is between -10V and +10V and its corresponding speed is
adjustable (P1-40).
When one of SPD0 and SPD1 is not 0, the speed command is from the internal
parameter. The command is activated after changing the status of SPD0~SPD1.
There is no need to use CTRG for triggering.
The setting range of internal parameters is between -50000 and 50000. Setting
value = setting range x unit (0.1r/min).
For example: P1-09 = +30000, setting value = +30000 x 0.1r/min = +3000r/min
The speed command not only can be issued in speed mode (S or Sz), but also in
torque mode (T or Tz) as the speed limit.
6.3.2 Control Structure of Speed Mode

The basic control structure is shown as the following diagram:
The speed command unit is to select speed command source according to Section
6.3.1, including the scaling (P1-40) setting and S-curve setting. The speed control unit
manages the gain parameters of the servo drive and calculates the current command
for servo motor in time. The resonance suppression unit is to suppress the resonance
of mechanism. Detailed descriptions are shown as the following:
Here firstly introduces the function of speed command unit. Its structure is as the
following diagram.

SPD0, SPD1 signal of CN1

Internal
parameter
P1-09
~P1-11 S-curve Filter
Command
P1-34, Low-pass Filter
Selection
P1-35, P1-06
P1-01
Proportion Analog Command P1-36
A/D Gain Filter
P1-40 P1-59
Analog signal
The upper path is the command from register while the lower one is external analog
command. The command is selected according to the status of SPD0, SPD1 and P1-
01(S or Sz). Usually, S-curve and low-pass filter are applied for having a smooth
resonance of command.
6.3.3 Smoothing Speed Command

S-curve Filter
During the process of acceleration or deceleration, S-curve filter applies the program
of three-stage acceleration curve for smoothing the motion command, which generates
the continuous acceleration. It is for avoiding the jerk (the differentiation of acceleration)
came from the sudden command change and indirectly causes the resonance and
noise. Users can use acceleration constant of S-curve (TACC) to adjust the slope
changed by acceleration, deceleration constant of S-curve (TDEC) to adjust the slope
changed by deceleration and acceleration / deceleration constant of S-curve (TSL) to
improve the status of motor activation and stop. The calculation of the time to complete
the command is provided.

Related parameters:
Address: 0144H
P1-34 TACC Acceleration Constant of S-Curve
0145H
Default: 200
Control
S
Mode:
Unit: ms
Range: 1 ~ 20000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display
Decimal
Format:
Settings: The time that speed command accelerates from 0 to 3000 r/min.
P1-34, P1-35 and P1-36, the acceleration time of speed
command from zero to the rated speed, all can be set
individually.
. NOTE 1When the source of speed command is analog, and P1-36 is

set to 0, it will disable S-curve function.
Address: 0146H
P1-35 TDEC Deceleration Constant of S-Curve
0147H
Default: 200
Control
S
Mode:
Unit: ms
Range: 1 ~ 20000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display
Decimal
Format:
Settings: The time that speed command decelerates from 3000 r/min to 0.
P1-34, P1-35 and P1-36, the deceleration time of speed
command from the rated speed to zero, all can be set
individually.
NOTE 1When the source of speed command is analog, and P1-36 is


Acceleration / Deceleration Constant of Address: 0148H

P1-36 TSL
S-curve 0149H
Default: 0
Control
S
Mode:
Unit: ms
Range: 0 ~ 10000 (0: Disabled)
Data Size: 16-bit
Display
Decimal
Format:
Settings: Acceleration / Deceleration Constant of S-Curve:
P1-34: Set the acceleration time of acceleration / deceleration of

trapezoid-curve
P1-35: Set the deceleration time of acceleration / deceleration of
trapezoid-curve
P1-36: Set the smoothing time of S-curve acceleration and
deceleration
P1-34, P1-35 and P1-36 can be set individually.


Analog Speed Command Filter

Analog speed command filter is provided especially for ASDA-B2 series users. It
mainly helps with buffer when the analog input signal changes too fast.
Speed (rpm) Analog speed command Motor Torque
3000
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Time (sec)
-3000
Analog speed command filter smooth the analog input command. Its time program is
the same as S-curve filter in normal speed. Also, the speed curve and the acceleration
curve are both continuous. The above is the diagram of analog speed command filter.
The slope of speed command in acceleration and deceleration is different. Users could
adjust the time setting (P1-34, P1-35 and P1-36) according to the actual situation to
improve the performance.
Command End Low-pass Filter

It is usually used to eliminate the unwanted high-frequency response or noise. It also
can smooth the command.
Related parameters:
Analog Speed Command (Low-pass Address: 010CH
P1-06 SFLT
Filter) 010DH
Default: 0
Control
S
Mode:
Unit: ms
Data Size: 16-bit
Display
Decimal
Format:

Target Speed
SFLT
6.3.4 The Scaling of Analog Command

The motor speed command is controlled by the analog voltage deviation between
V_REF and VGND. Use parameter P1-40 to adjust the speed-control slope and its
range.
5000rpm
The speed control ramp is
determined by parameter P1-40
3000rpm
-10 -5
5 10 Analog Input Voltage (V)
-3000rpm
-5000rpm
Related parameters:
Address: 0150H
P1-40 VCM Max. Speed of Analog Speed Command
0151H
Default: rated speed
Control
S, T
Mode:
Unit: r/min
Range: 0 ~ 10000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display
Decimal
Format:
Settings: Maximum Speed of Analog Speed Command:
In speed mode, the analog speed command inputs the swing
speed setting of the max. voltage (10V).
For example, if the setting is 3000, when the external voltage
input is 10V, it means the speed control command is 3000r/min.

If the external voltage input is 5V, then the speed control

command is 1500r/min.
6.3.5 Timing Diagram in Speed Mode

S4 (P1-11)
Internal speed
S3 (P1-10)
command
S2 (P1-09)
External analog
voltage or zero (0) S1
SPD0 OFF ON OFF ON
External I/O signal SPD1 OFF ON
SON ON
NOTE 1) OFF means the contact point is open while ON means the contact
point is close.
2) When it is in Sz mode, the speed command S1 = 0; When it is in S
mode, the speed command S1 is the external analog voltage input.
3) When the servo drive is On, please select the command according to
SPD0~SPD1 status.
6.3.6 Gain Adjustment of Speed Loop

Here introduces the function of speed control unit. The following shows its structure.

Many kinds of gain in speed control unit are adjustable. Two ways, manual and auto,
are provided for selection.
Manual: All parameters are set by users and the auto or auxiliary function will be
disabled in this mode.
Auto: General load inertia estimation is provided. It adjusts the parameter automatically.
Its framework is divided into PI auto gain adjustment and PDFF auto gain adjustment.
Parameter P2-32 can be used to adjust the gain.
Address: 0240H
P2-32 AUT2 Tuning Mode Selection
0241H
Interface: Section 5.6,
Default: 0 Section 6.3.6
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 2
Data Size: 16-bit
Display
Hexadecimal
Format:
Settings: 0: Manual Mode
1: Auto Mode (continuous adjustment)
2: Semi-auto Mode (non- continuous adjustment)
Relevant description of manual mode setting:
When P2-32 is set to 0, parameters related to gain control, such
as P2-00, P2-02, P2-04, P2-06, P2-07, P2-25 and P2-26, all can
be set by the user.
When switching mode from auto or semi-auto to manual,
parameters about gain will be updated automatically.
Relevant description of auto mode setting:

Continue to estimate the system inertia, save the inertia ratio to
P1-37 every 30 minutes automatically and refer to the stiffness
and bandwidth setting of P2-31.
1. Set the system to manual mode 0 from auto 1 or semi-auto 2,
the system will save the estimated inertia value to P1-37
automatically and set the corresponding parameters.
2. Set the system to auto mode 1 or semi-auto mode 2 from
manual mode 0, please set P1-37 to the appropriate value.
3. Set the system to manual mode 0 from auto mode 1, P2-00,
P2-04 and P2-06 will be modified to the corresponding
parameters of auto mode.

4. Set the system to manual mode 0 from semi-auto mode 2, P2-

00, P2-04, P2-06, P2-25 and P2-26 will be modified to the
corresponding parameters of semi-auto mode.
Relevant description of semi-auto mode setting:

1. When the system inertia is stable, the value of P2-33 will be 1
and the system stops estimating. The inertia value will be
saved to P1-37 automatically. When switching mode to semi-
auto mode (from manual or auto mode), the system starts to
estimate again.
2. When the system inertia is over the range, the value of P2-33
will be 0 and the system starts to estimate and adjust again.
Manual Mode
When P2-32 is set to 0, users can define Speed Loop Gain (P2-04), Speed Integral
Compensation (P2-06) and Speed Feed Forward Gain (P2-07). Influence of each
parameter is as the followings.
Proportional gain: To increase proportional gain can enhance the response frequency
of speed loop.
Integral gain: To increase the integral gain could increase the low-frequency stiffness
of speed loop, reduce the steady-state error and sacrifice the phase
margin. The over high integral gain will cause the instability of the
system.
Feed forward gain: Diminish the deviation of phase delay.
Related parameters:
Address: 0208H
P2-04 KVP Speed Loop Gain
0209H
Default: 500
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: rad/s
Range: 0 ~ 8191
Data Size: 16-bit
Display
Decimal
Format:
Settings: Increase the value of speed loop gain can enhance the speed
response. However, if the value is set too big, it would easily
cause resonance and noise.

Address: 020CH
P2-06 KVI Speed Integral Compensation
020DH
Keypad/Software Communication
Default: 100
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: rad/s
Range: 0 ~ 1023
Data Size: 16-bit
Display
Decimal
Format:
Settings: Increasing the value of speed integral compensation can
enhance speed response and diminish the deviation of speed
control. However, if the value is set too big, it would easily cause
resonance and noise.
Address: 020EH
P2-07 KVF Speed Feed Forward Gain
020FH
Default: 0
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: %
Range: 0 ~ 100
Data Size: 16-bit
Display
Decimal
Format:
Settings: When the speed control command runs smoothly, increasing the
gain value can reduce the speed command error. If the command
does not run smoothly, decreasing the gain value can reduce the
mechanical vibration during operation.

Theoretically, stepping response can be used to explain proportional gain (KVP),

integral gain (KVI) and feed forward gain (KVF). Here, the frequency domain and time
domain are used to illustrate the basic principle.
Frequency Domain

Time Domain
The bigger KVP value cause

higher bandwidth and shorten the
rising time. However, if the value
is set too big, the phase margin
will be too small.
To steady-state error, the result
is not as good as KVI. But it
helps to reduce the dynamic
following error.
The bigger KVI value cause greater low-

frequency gain and shorten the time the
steady-state error returns to zero.
However, the phase margin will
dramatically decrease as well.
To steady-state error, it is very helpful but
shows no benefit to dynamic following
error.
If the KVF value closes to 1, the

feed forward compensation will be
more complete and the dynamic
following error will become
smaller. However, if the KVF
value is set too big, it would cause
vibration.

Generally, instrument is needed when applying frequency domain for measurement.

Users are required to adopt the measurement techniques; while time domain only
needs a scope and goes with the analog input / output terminal provided by the servo
drive. Thus, time domain is frequently used to adjust PI controller. The abilities of PI
controller to deal with the resistance of torque load and the following command are the
same.
That is to say, the following command and resistance of torque load have the same
performance in frequency domain and time domain. Users can reduce the bandwidth
by setting the low-pass filter in command end.
Auto Mode
Auto mode adopts adaptive principle. The servo drive automatically adjusts the
parameters according to the external load. Since the adaptive principle takes longer
time, it will be unsuitable if the load changes too fast. It would be better to wait until the
load inertia is steady or changes slowly. Depending on the speed of signal input, the
adaptive time will be different from one another.
Motor Speed
Inertia Measurement

6.3.7 Resonance Suppression

When resonance occurs, it is probably because the stiffness of the control system is
too strong or the response is too fast. Eliminating these two factors might improve the
situation. In addition, low-pass filter (parameter P2-25) and notch filter (parameter P2-
23 and P2-24) are provided to suppress the resonance if not changing the control
parameters.
Related parameters:
Address: 022EH
P2-23 NCF1 Resonance Suppression (Notch Filter) 1
022FH
Default: 1000
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: Hz
Range: 50 ~ 2000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display
Decimal
Format:
Settings: The first setting value of resonance frequency. If P2-24 is set to 0,
this function is disabled. P2-43 and P2-44 are the second Notch
filter.
Resonance Suppression (Notch Filter) Address: 0230H

P2-24 DPH1
Attenuation Rate (1) 0231H
Default: 0
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: dB
Data Size: 16-bit
Display
Decimal
Format:
Settings: The first resonance suppression (notch filter) attenuation rate.
When this parameter is set to 0, the function of Notch filter is
disabled.

Address: 0256H
0257H
Default: 1000
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: Hz
Range: 50 ~ 2000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display
Decimal
Format:
Settings: The second setting value of resonance frequency. If P2-44 is set
to 0, this function is disabled. P2-23 and P2-24 are the first Notch
filter.

P2-44 DPH2
Default: 0
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: dB (0: Disable the function of notch filter)
Range: 0 ~ 32
Data Size: 16-bit
Display
Decimal
Format:
Settings: The second resonance suppression (notch filter) attenuation
rate. When this parameter is set to 0, the function of Notch filter
is disabled.
Address: 025AH
025BH
Default: 1000
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: Hz
Range: 50 ~ 2000

Data Size: 16-bit

Display
Decimal
Format:
Settings: The third group of mechanism resonance frequency setting value.
If P2-46 is set to 0, this function will be disabled. P2-23 and P2-
24 are the first group of resonance suppression (Notch filter).
Resonance Suppression (Notch Filter) Address: 025CH

P2-46 DPH3
Attenuation Rate (3) 025DH
Default: 0
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: dB
Range: 0 ~ 32
Data Size: 16-bit
Display
Decimal
Format:
Settings: The third group of resonance suppression (Notch filter)
attenuation rate. Set the value to 0 to disable the function of
Notch filter.
Low-pass Filter of Resonance Address: 0232H

P2-25 NLP
Suppression 0233H
Keypad/Software Communication
Default: 0.2 (1kW and below 2 (1kW and below
models) or 0.5 models) or 5 (other
(other models) models)
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: 1ms 0.1ms
Range: 0.0 ~ 100.0 0 ~ 1000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display
One-digit Decimal
Format:
Input Value
1.5 = 1.5 ms 15 = 1.5 ms
Example:
Settings: Set the low-pass filter of resonance suppression. When the value
is set to 0, the function of low-pass filter is disabled.

There are two sets of auto resonance suppression, one is P2-43 and P2-44 and another
one is P2-45 and P2-46. When the resonance occurs, set P2-47 to 1 or 2 (enable the
function of resonance suppression), the servo drive searches the point of resonance
frequency and suppresses the resonance automatically. Write the point of frequency into
P2-43 and P2-45 and write the attenuation rate into P2-44 and P2-46. When P2-47 is set
to 1, the system will set P2-47 to 0 (disable the function of auto suppression) automatically
after completing resonance suppression and the system is stable for 20 minutes. When
P2-47 is set to 2, the system will keep searching the point of resonance.
When P2-47 is set to 1 or 2, but resonance still exists, please confirm the value of
parameter P2-44 and P2-46. If one of them is 32, it is suggested to reduce the speed
bandwidth first and then start to estimate again. If the value of both is smaller than 32 and
resonance still exists, please set P2-47 to 0 first and then manually increase the value of
P2-44 and P2-46. It is suggested to reduce the bandwidth if the resonance has not been
improved. Then use the function of auto resonance suppression.
When manually increase the value of P2-44 and P2-46, please check if the value of both is
bigger than 0. If yes, it means the frequency point of P2-43 and P2-45 is the one searched
by auto resonance suppression. If the value of both is 0, it means the default, 1000 of P2-
43 and P2-45 is not the one searched by auto resonance suppression. Deepen the
resonance suppression attenuation rate might worsen the situation.
Settings of P2-47
Current Value Desired Value Function
Clear the setting value of P2-43 ~ P2-46 and
0 1
enable auto resonance suppression function.
0 2
Save the setting value of P2-43 ~ P2-46 and
1 0
disable auto resonance suppression function.

Settings of P2-47
Current Value Desired Value Function
1 1
Do not clear the setting value of P2-43 ~ P2-46
1 2 and enable auto resonance suppression function
continuously.
Save the setting value of P2-43 ~ P2-46 and
2 0
disable auto resonance suppression function.
2 1
Do not clear the setting value of P2-43 ~ P2-46
2 2 and enable auto resonance suppression function
continuously.

Flowchart of auto resonance suppression:
Drive the machine

by servo system
Check if vibration No
occurs
Yes
Set P2-47 = 1
No
Check if vibration
occurs
Yes
No Set P2-47 = 1 for

three time
Yes
Decrease frequency Yes P2-44 = 32

response or P2-46 = 32
No
Set P2-47 = 0
If P2-44 >0, value of P2-44 should + 1

If P2-46 >0, value of P2-46 should + 1
No Check if vibration
condition has improved
Yes
Yes
Check if vibration
occurs
No
Set P2-47 = 0
Complete

Here illustrates the effect via low-pass filter (parameter P2-25). The following diagram
is the system open-loop gain with resonance.
Gain
Frequency
When the value of P2-25 is increased from 0, BW becomes smaller (See as the
following diagram). Although it solves the problem of resonance frequency, the
response bandwidth and phase margin is reduced.
Gain
0dB Frequency
BW
If users know the resonance frequency, notch filter (parameter P2-23 and P2-24) can
directly eliminate the resonance. The frequency setting range of notch filter is merely
from 50 to 1000Hz. The suppression strength is from 0 to 32dB. If the resonance
frequency is not within the range, it is suggested to use low-pass filter (parameter P2-
25).
Here firstly illustrates the influence brought by notch filter (P2-23 and P2-24) and low-
pass filter (P2-25). The following diagrams are the system of open-loop gain with
resonance.
Resonance suppression with notch filter
Resonance
Resonance
Gain conditions
Point Gain Gain
Notch Filter is suppressed
0db
Low-pass Low-pass
Frequency Attenuation Frequency
Rate P2-24
Resonance Frequency Frequency Resonance Frequency

Resonance
Frequency . Frequency Frequency .
P2-23

Resonance suppression with low-pass filter

.
Resonance
Resonance conditions
Gain Gain Low-pass Filter Gain
Point is suppressed
Attenuation
Rate -3db Cut-off Frequency
0db
Low-pass of Low-pass Filter Low-pass
Frequency -
= 10000 / P2-25 Hz Frequency
Resonance Frequency Frequency Frequency

Resonance
Frequency Frequency .
When the value of P2-25 is increased from 0, BW becomes smaller. Although it solves
the problem of resonance frequency, the response bandwidth and phase margin is
reduced. Also, the system becomes unstable.
If users know the resonance frequency, notch filter (parameter P2-23 and P2-24) can
directly eliminate the resonance. In this case, notch filter will be more helpful than low-
pass filter. However, if the resonance frequency drifts because of time or other factors,
notch filter will not do.

6.4 Torque Mode

Torque control mode (T or Tz) is appropriate in torque control application, such as printing
machine, winding machine, etc. There are two kinds of command source, analog input and
register. Analog command input uses external voltage to control the torque of the motor
while register uses the internal parameters (P1-12~P1-14) as the torque command.
6.4.1 Selection of Torque Command

Torque command source are external analog voltage and parameters. It uses CN1 DI
signal for selection. See as below.
DI signal of
Torque CN1 Command Source Content Range
Command
TCM1 TCM0
External analog Voltage between
T +/- 10 V
T1 0 0 Mode signal T-REF-GND
Tz None Torque command is 0 0
+/- 300
T2 0 1 P1-12
%
+/- 300
T3 1 0 Parameters P1-13
%
+/- 300
T4 1 1 P1-14
%
The status of TCM0 ~ TCM1: 0 means DI OFF and 1 means DI ON.
When TCM0 = TCM1 = 0, if it is in Tz mode, then the command is 0. Thus, if
there is no need to use analog voltage as torque command, Tz mode is
applicable and can avoid the problem of zero drift. If it is in T mode, the
command will be the voltage deviation between T-REF and GND. Its input
voltage range is -10V +10V, which mean the corresponding torque is
adjustable (P1-41).
When neither TCM0 nor TCM1 is 0, parameters become the source of torque
command. The command will be executed after TCM0 ~ TCM1 are changed.
There is no need to use CTRG for triggering.
The torque command can be used in torque mode (T or Tz) and speed mode (S or Sz).
When it is in speed mode, it can be regarded as the command input of torque limit.

6.4.2 Control Structure of Torque Mode

The basic control structure is as the following diagram:
The toque command unit is to select torque command source according to Section
6.4.1, including the scaling (P1-41) setting and S-curve setting. The current control unit
manages the gain parameters of the servo drive and calculates the current for servo
motor in time. Since the current control unit is very complicated, and is not relevant to
the application. There is no need to adjust parameters. Only command end setting is
provided.
The structure of torque command unit is as the following diagram.
The upper path is the command from register while the lower one is external analog
command. The command is selected according to the status of TCM0, TCM1 and P1-
01 (T or Tz). The torque represented by analog voltage command can be adjusted via
the scaling and can obtain a smoother response via low-pass filter.

6.4.3 Smooth Torque Mode

Related parameters:
Analog Torque Command (Low-pass Address: 010EH
P1-07 TFLT
Filter) 010FH
Default: 0
Control
T
Mode:
Unit: ms
Data Size: 16-bit
Display
Decimal
Format:
Target Speed
TFLT
6.4.4 The Scaling of Analog Command

The motor torque command is controlled by the analog voltage deviation between
T_REF and GND and goes with parameter P1-41 to adjust the torque slope and its
range.
300%
The torque control ramp is
determined by parameter P1-41
100%
-10 -5
Torque command
5 10 Analog Input Voltage (V)
-100%
-300%

Relevant parameters:
Address: 0152H
P1-41 TCM Max. Output of Analog Torque Command
0153H
Default: 100
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: %
Range: 0 ~ 1000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display
Decimal
Format:
Settings: Maximum Output of Analog Torque Command:
In torque mode, the analog torque command inputs the torque
setting of the max. voltage (10V). When the default setting is
100, if the external voltage inputs 10V, it means the torque
control command is 100% rated torque. If the external voltage
inputs 5V, then the torque control command is 50% rated torque.
Torque control command = input voltage value x setting value
10 (%)
In speed, PT and PR mode, the analog torque limit inputs the
torque limit setting of the max. voltage (10V).
Torque limit command = input voltage value x setting value10
(%)

6.4.5 Timing Diagram of Torque Mode
T4 (P1-14)
Internal speed T3 (P1-13)
command
T2 (P1-12)
External analog
voltage or zero (0) T1
TCM0 OFF ON OFF ON
TCM1 OFF ON
External I/O signal
SON ON
NOTE 1OFF means the contact point is open while ON means the contact
point is close.
2When it is in Tz mode, the torque command T1 = 0; When it is in T
mode, the torque command T1 is the external analog voltage input.
3 When the servo drive is Servo On, please select the command
according to TCM0~TCM1 status.

6.5 Dual Modes

Apart from single mode, dual mode is also provided for operation. According to Section 6.1,
dual modes are as followings:
1 Speed / Position dual mode (PT-S)
2 Speed / Torque dual mode (S-T)
3 Torque / Position dual mode (PT-T)
Mode Short Setting Description

Name Name Code
PT-S 06 PT and S can be switched via DI signal, S_P.
Dual Mode PT-T 07 PT and T can be switched via DI signal, T_P.
S-T 0A S and T can be switched via DI signal, S_T.
Sz and Tz dual mode is not provided here. For avoiding occupying too many digital inputs
in dual mode, speed and torque mode can use external analog voltage as the command
source so as to reduce digital input (SPD0, SPD1 or TCM0, TCM1). Please refer to
Chapter 3.3.2, table 3.1, Default Value of DI Input Function and table 3.2, Default Value of
DO Output Function for the default DI/DO of each mode.
The relationship between DI/DO signals and PIN define are set after the mode is selected.
If users desire to change the setting, please refer to Chapter 3.3.4.
6.5.1 Speed / Position Dual Mode

The command source of PT-S mode is from external pulse. Speed command can be
issued by the external analog voltage or internal parameters (P1-09 to P1-11). The
switch of speed and position mode is controlled by the S-P signal. The timing diagram
is shown as below:

6.5.2 Speed / Torque Dual Mode

S-T is the only mode. The speed command comes from the external analog voltage
and internal parameters (P1-09 ~P1-11), which is selected via SPD0~SPD1. Similarly,
the source of torque command could be external analog voltage and internal
parameters (P1-12 P1-14) and is selected via TCM0~TCM1. The switch of
speed/torque mode is controlled by S-T signal. The timing diagram is shown as below.
In torque mode (S-T is ON), the torque command is selected via TCM0 and TCM1.
When switching to speed mode (S-T is OFF), the torque command is selected via
SPD0 and SPD 1. The motor operates according to the speed command. When S-T is
ON, it goes back to the torque mode again. Please refer to the introduction of single
mode for DI signal and the selected command of each mode.
6.5.3 Torque / Position Dual Mode

The command source of PT-T mode is from external pulse. Torque command can be
issued by the external analog voltage or internal parameters (P1-12 to P1-14). The
switch of torque and position mode is controlled by T-P signal.
The timing diagram is shown as below:

6.6 Others
6.6.1 The Use of Speed Limit
The maximum speed in each mode is limited by internal parameters (P1-55), not
matter it is in position, speed or torque mode.
The issuing method of speed limit command and speed command is the same. The
command source could be external analog voltage or internal parameter (P1-09 ~ P1-
11). Please refer to Section 6.3.1 for descriptions.
Speed limit can be used in torque mode (T) only. It is used for limiting the motor speed.
When the command in torque mode is issued by external analog voltage, DI signal is
enough and can be regarded as SPD0~SPD1 which is used to determine the speed
limit command (internal parameters). If the DI signal is not enough, speed limit
command can be issued by analog voltage. When the function of disable/enable limit
function in P1-02 is set to 1, the speed limit function is enabled. See the timing
diagram as below.
Disable / Enable Speed Limit Function
Settings in parameter P1-02 is set to 1
Disable / Enable Speed Limit Function
SPD0~1 INVALID SPD0~1 VALID
Command Source Selection of Speed Limit
6.6.2 The Use of Torque Limit

The issuing method of torque limit command and torque command is the same. The
command source could be external analog voltage or internal parameter (P1-12 ~ P1-
14). Please refer to Chapter 6.4.1 for descriptions.
Torque limit can be used in position mode (PT) or speed mode (S). It is used for
limiting the motor torque output. When the command in position mode is issued by
external analog voltage, DI signal is enough and can be regarded as TCM0~TCM1,
which is used to determine torque limit command (internal parameters). If the DI signal
is not enough, torque limit command can be issued by analog voltage. When the
function of disable/enable torque limit function in P1-02 is set to 1, the torque limit
function is enabled. See the timing diagram as below.
Disable / Enable Torque Limit Function
Disable / Enable Torque Limit Function
TCM0~1 INVALID TCM0~1 VALID
Command Source Selection of Torque Limit

6.6.3 Analog Monitor

Users could observe the needed voltage signal via analog monitor. Two analog
channels are provided by the servo drive and locate in terminal 1 and 3 of CN5. The
related parameter settings are as the followings.
Address: 0006H
P0-03 MON Analog Monitor Output
0007H
Default: 00
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: -
Range: 00 ~ 77
Data Size: 16-bit
Display
Hexadecimal
Format:
Settings:
MON1, MON2
Description
Setting Value
0 Motor speed (+/-8 Volts/Max. speed)
1 Motor torque (+/-8 Volts/Max. torque)
Pulse command frequency (+8 Volts /
2
4.5Mpps)
Speed command (+/-8 Volts/ Max. speed
3
command)
Torque command (+/-8 Volts/Max. torque
4
command)
5 VBUS voltage (+/-8 Volts450V)
6 Reserved

NOTE Please refer to parameter P1-04, P1-05 for proportional setting of

analog output voltage.
For example: P0-03 = 01 (MON1 is the analog output of motor
speed; MON2 is the analog output of motor torque (force))

MON1 output voltage 8 (unitVolts)
.

MON2 output voltage 8 (unit: Volts)
.
Address: 0106H
P1-03 AOUT Polarity Setting of Encoder Pulse Output
0107H
Default: 0
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: -
Range: 0 ~ 13
Data Size: 16-bit
Display
Hexadecimal
Format:
Settings
Polarity of monitor analog output
Polarity of encoder pulse output
Not in use

0: MON1 (+), MON2 (+)
1: MON1 (+), MON2 (-)
2: MON1 (-), MON2 (+)
3: MON1 (-), MON2 (-)
0: Forward output
1: Reverse output

Analog Monitor Output Proportion 1 Address: 0108H

P1-04 MON1
(MON1) 0109H
Default: 100
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: % (full scale)
Range: 0 ~ 100
Data Size: 16-bit
Display
Decimal
Format:
Settings: Please refer to parameter P0-03 for the setting of analog output
selection.
Example: P0-03 = 01 (MON1 is motor speed analog output,
MON2 is motor torque analog output)
Motor speed
MON1 output voltage= 8 (unit: Volts)
P1-04
(Max. motor speed )
100
Motor toque
P1-05
(Max. motor torque )
100
MON2 Analog Monitor Output Proportion Address: 010AH

P1-05 MON2
2 010BH
Default: 100
Control
ALL
Mode:
Range: 0 ~ 100
Data Size: 16-bit
Display
Decimal
Format:
Settings: Please refer to parameter P0-03 for the setting of analog output
selection.

Motor speed
P1-04
(Max. motor speed )
100
Motor toque
P1-05
100
Offset Adjustment Value of Analog Address: 0428H

P4-20 DOF1
Monitor Output (MON1) 0429H
Panel / Software Communication
Default: Factory setting
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: mV
Range: -800 ~ 800
Data Size: 16-bit
Display
Decimal
Format:
Settings: Offset adjustment value (cannot reset)
Offset Adjustment Value of Analog Address: 042AH

P4-21 DOF2
Monitor Output (MON2) 042BH
Default: 0
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: mV
Range: -800 ~ 800
Data Size: 16-bit
Display
Decimal
Format:

For example, if users desire to observe the voltage signal in channel 1 and set this
channel for observing the pulse command frequency, when the pulse command
frequency 325 Kpps corresponds to 8V output voltage, users need to adjust the
monitor output proportion of P1-04 to 50 (= 325 Kpps/ Max. input frequency). Other
related settings include P0-03 (X= 3) and P1-03 (The polarity setting range of monitor
analog output is between 0 and 3, and it can set positive/negative polarity output).
Generally speaking, the output voltage of Ch1 is V1; the pulse command frequency is
(Max. input frequency V1/8) P1-04/100.
Because of the offset value, the zero voltage level of analog monitor output does not
match to the zero point of the setting. This can be improved via the setting of offset
adjustment value of analog monitor output, DOF1 (4-20) and DOF2 (P4-21). The
voltage level of analog monitor output is 8V, if the output voltage exceeds the range,
it will be limited within 8V. The provided resolution is about 10bits, which equals to
13mV/LSB.
8V
DOF
-8V

6.6.4 The Use of Brake

When operating brake via servo drive, if the DO signal, BRKR is set to OFF, it means
the brake is not working and the motor will be locked. If BRKR is set to ON, it means
the brake is working and the motor can operate. The operation of brake has two kinds.
Users can set the relevant dealy via regiser MBT1 (P1-42) and MBT2 (P1-43). It is
usually applied in Z axis in order to reduce the heat generated when servo motor puts
up resistance and shorten its lifetime. In order to avoid the error of brake, it must be
worked when the servo drive is off. To operate the brake, the brake has to be activated
before the motor stops running (Servo OFF). The brake has to be released after Servo
ON. Otherwise, it would become the loading of the motor and might damage the brake.
If it works during the process of acceleration or constant speed, the servo drive needs
to generate more current to resist the brakeforce of brake and it might cause the alarm
of overload warning.
Timing diagram of brake control:

ON
SON
OFF OFF
(DI Input)
ON
BRKR OFF OFF
(DO Output)
MBT1(P1-42) MBT2(P1-43)
ZSPD(P1-38)
Motor Speed
The output timing of BRKR:

1. When Servo OFF, go through the time set by P1-43 and the motor speed is
faster than the setting in P1-38, DO.BRKR is OFF (the brake is locked).
2. When Servo Off, has not reached the time set by P1-43 but the motor speed is
slower than the setting in P1-38, DO.BRKR is OFF (the brake is locked.).

The wiring diagram of using mechanical brake:
Servo Drive Do not connect VDD-COM+

DOX(DOX+,DOX-) Ensure the polarity of
X=1,2,3,4,5 Diode is correct, or it When emergency stop signal
might damage the drive is activated, this circuit Motor
breaker will be enabled.
DO1(7,6)
DO2(5,4) Brake 1(blue)
DO3(3,2)
DO4(1,26) Brake
DO5(28,27)
DOX+
for brake
Relay DC24V DC24V Encoder
DOX-
Brake 2(brown)
NOTE 1Please refer to Chapter 3, Wiring.

2The brake signal controls the solenoid valve, provides power to
the brake and enables the brake.
3Please note that there is no polarity in coil brake.
4Do not use brake power and control power (VDD) at the same
time.
Timing diagram of control power and main power:

L1, L2
Control Circuit
Power
1 sec
5V
Control Circuit
Power
> 0msec
R, S, T
Main Circuit
Power
800ms
BUS Voltage
READY
2 sec
SERVO
READY
SERVO ON
(DI Input)
1 msec (min)+ Response Filter Time of Digital Input ( P2-09)
SERVO ON
(DO Output)
Input available
Position \ Speed \
Torque Command
Input

Chapter 7 Parameters
7.1 Parameter Definition
Parameters are divided into five groups which are shown as follows. The first character
after the start code P is the group character and the second character is the parameter
character.
As for the communication address, it is the combination of group number along with two
digit number in hexadecimal. The definition of parameter groups is as the followings:
Group 0: Monitor parameters (example: P0-xx)

Group 1: Basic parameters (example: P1-xx)
Group 2: Extension parameters (example: P2-xx)
Group 3: Communication parameters (example: P3-xx)
Group 4: Diagnosis parameters (example: P4-xx)
Abbreviation of control modes:

PT: Position control mode (command from external signal)
S: Speed control mode
T: Torque control mode
Explanation of symbols (marked after parameter)

() Read-only register, such as P0-00, P0-01, P4-00.
() Setting is invalid when Servo On, such as P1-00, P1-46 and P2-33.
() Not effective until re-power on or off the servo drive, such as P1-01 and P3-00.
() Volatile parameters, such as P2-31 and P3-06.
Revision December, 2014 7-1

Chapter 7 Parameters ASDA-B2
7.2 Lists of Parameters
Monitor and General Output Parameter

Control Mode Related
Parameter Abbr. Funciton Default Unit
PT S T Section
Factory
P0-00 VER Firmware Version Setting
N/A O O O -
11.1
Alarm Code Display of Drive
P0-01 ALE N/A N/A O O O 11.2
(Seven-segment Display)
11.3
P0-02 STS Drive Status 00 N/A O O O 7.2
P0-03 MON Analog Output Monitor 01 N/A O O O -
P0-08 TSON Servo On Time 0 Hour -
P0-09 CM1 Status Monitor Register 1 N/A N/A O O O 4.3.5

Status Monitor Register 1
P0-17 CM1A 0 N/A -
Selection
P0-18 CM2A 0 N/A -
Selection
P0-19 CM3A 0 N/A -
Selection
P0-20 CM4A 0 N/A -
Selection
P0-21 CM5A 0 N/A -
Selection
Servo Digital Output Status
P0-46 SVSTS 0 N/A O O O -
Display
MON1 Analog Monitor Output % (full
P1-04 MON1 100 O O O 6.4.4
Proportion scale)
MON2 Analog Monitor Output % (full
P1-05 MON2 100 O O O 6.4.4
Proportion scale)
() Read-only register, e.g. parameter P0-00, P0-10 and P4-00, etc.
() Setting is invalid when Servo On, e.g. parameter P1-00, P1-46 and P2-33, etc.
() Not effective until re-power on or off the servo drive, e.g. parameter P1-01 and
P3-00.
() Volatile parameters, e.g. parameter P2-30 and P3-06.
7-2 Revision December, 2014

ASDA-B2 Chapter 7 Parameters
Filter and Resonance Suppression

Parameter Abbr. Function Default Unit
PT S T Section
Analog Speed Command
P1-06 SFLT 0 ms O 6.3.3
(Low-pass Filter)
Analog Torque Command
P1-07 TFLT 0 ms O 6.4.3
(Low-pass Filter)
Smooth Constant of Position
P1-08 PFLT Command 0 10ms O 6.2.4
(Low-pass Filter)
Acceleration Constant of
P1-34 TACC 200 ms O 6.3.3
S-Curve
Deceleration Constant of
P1-35 TDEC 200 ms O 6.3.3
S-Curve
Acceleration / Deceleration
P1-36 TSL 0 ms O 6.3.3
Constant of S-Curve
P1-59 MFLT Analog Speed Command 0 0.1ms O -
P1-62 FRCL Friction Compensation 0 % O O O -
P1-63 FRCT Friction Compensation 0 ms O O O -
Position Command Moving
P1-68 PFLT2 0 ms O -
Filter
Resonance suppression
P2-23 NCF1 1000 Hz O O O 6.3.7
(Notch filter) (1)
Resonance Suppression (Notch
P2-24 DPH1 0 dB O O O 6.3.7
filter) Attenuation Rate (1)
P2-43 NCF2 1000 Hz O O O 6.3.7
(Notch filter) (2)
P2-44 DPH2 0 dB O O O 6.3.7
P2-45 NCF3 1000 Hz O O O 6.3.7
(Notch filter) (3)
P2-46 DPH3 0 dB O O O 6.3.7
Auto Resonance Suppression
P2-47 ANCF 1 N/A O O O -
Mode Setting
Resonance Suppression
P2-48 ANCL 100 N/A O O O -
Detection Level
Low-pass Filter of Resonance
P2-25 NLP 2 or 5 0.1ms O O O 6.3.7
Suppression
P2-49 SJIT Speed Detection Filter 0 sec O O O -
P3-00.

Gain and Switch Parameter

PT S T Section
P2-00 KPP Position Loop Gain 35 rad/s O 6.2.5
Switching Rate of Position
P2-01 PPR 100 % O 6.2.5
Loop Gain
P2-02 PFG Position Feed Forward Gain 50 % O 6.2.5
Smooth Constant of Position
P2-03 PFF 5 ms O -
Feed Forward Gain
P2-04 KVP Speed Loop Gain 500 rad/s O O O 6.3.6
Switching Rate of Speed
P2-05 SPR 100 % O O O -
Loop Gain
P2-06 KVI Speed Integral Compensation 100 rad/s O O O 6.3.6
P2-07 KVF Speed Feed Forward Gain 0 % O O O 6.3.6
P2-26 DST Anti-interference Gain 0 0.001 O O O -
Gain Switching and Switching
P2-27 GCC 0 N/A O O O -
Selection
Gain Switching Time
P2-28 GUT 10 10ms O O O -
Constant
pulse
P2-29 GPE Gain Switching 1280000 Kpps O O O -
r/min
Speed Loop Frequency 5.6
P2-31 AUT1 Response Setting in Auto and 80 Hz O O O
Semi-auto Mode 6.3.6
5.6
P2-32 AUT2 Tuning Mode Selection 0 N/A O O O
6.3.6
P3-00.

Position Control Parameter

PT S T Section
pulse
Input Setting of Control Mode
P1-01 CTL 0 r/min O O O 6.1
and Control Command
N-M
Speed and Torque Limit
P1-02 PSTL 0 N/A O O O 6.6
Setting
P1-12 ~
TQ1 ~ 3 Internal Torque Limit 1 ~ 3 100 % O O O 6.4.1
P1-14
Pulse Number of Encoder
P1-46 GR3 2500 pulse O O O -
Output
P1-55 MSPD Maximum Speed Setting rated r/min O O O -
P2-50 DCLR Pulse Clear Mode 0 N/A O -
External Pulse Control Command (PT mode)
P1-00 PTT External Pulse Input Type 0x2 N/A O 6.2.1
P1-44 GR1 Gear Ratio (Numerator) (N1) 1 pulse O 6.2.3
P1-45 GR2 Gear Ratio (Denominator) (M) 1 pulse O 6.2.3
P2-60 GR4 Gear Ratio (Numerator) (N2) 1 pulse O -
P3-00.

Speed Control Parameter

PT S T Section
pulse
and Control Command
N-M
P1-02 PSTL 0 N/A O O O 6.6
Setting
Output Pulse Counts Per One
P1-46 GR3 1 pulse O O O -
Motor Revolution
P1-55 MSPD Maximum Speed Limit rated r/min O O O -
1000
P1-09 ~ Internal Speed Command 1 ~ 0.1
SP1 ~ 3 ~ O O 6.3.1
P1-11 3 r/min
3000
P1-12 ~
TQ1 ~ 3 Internal Torque Limit 1 ~ 3 100 % O O O 6.6.2
P1-14
Maximum Speed of Analog
P1-40 VCM rated r/min O O 6.3.4
Speed Command
Maximum Output of Analog
P1-41 TCM 100 % O O O -
Torque Speed
Maximum Rotation Setting of
P1-76 AMSPD 5500 r/min O O O -
Encoder Setting (OA, OB)
P3-00.

Torque Control Parameter

PT S T Section
pulse
and Control Command
N-M
P1-02 PSTL 0 N/A O O O 6.6
Setting
Output Pulse Counts Per One
P1-46 GR3 1 pulse O O O -
Motor Revolution
P1-55 MSPD Maximum Speed Limit rated r/min O O O -
P1-09 1000
~ SP1~3 Internal Speed Limit 1~3 ~ r/min O O 6.6.1
P1-11 3000
P1-12
~ TQ1~3 Internal Torque Command 1~3 100 % O O O 6.4.1
P1-14
Maximum Speed of Analog
P1-40 VCM rated r/min O O -
Speed Command
Maximum Output of Analog
P1-41 TCM 100 % O O O 6.4.4
Torque Limit
P3-00.

Planning of Digital Input / Output and Output Setting Parameter

PT S T Section
P2-09 DRT DI Debouncing Time 2 2ms O O O -
Table
P2-10 DI1 DI1 Functional Planning 101 N/A O O O
7.1
Table
7.1
Table
7.1
Table
7.1
Table
7.1
Table
7.1
Table
7.1
Table
7.1
Table
7.1
Table
P2-18 DO1 DO1 Functional Planning 101 N/A O O O
7.2
Table
7.2
Table
7.2
Table
7.2
Table
7.2
Table
7.2
0.1 Table
P1-38 ZSPD Zero Speed Range Setting 100 O O O
r/min 7.2
Table
P1-39 SSPD Target Motor Detection Level 3000 r/min O O O
7.2
P1-42 MBT1 Enable Delay Time of Brake 0 ms O O O 6.5.5
P1-43 MBT2 Disable Delay Time of Brake 0 ms O O O 6.5.5
Speed Reached (DOSP_OK) Table
P1-47 SCPD 10 r/min O
Range 7.2

Table
P1-54 PER Position Completed Range 12800 pulse O
7.2
Output Overload Warning Table
P1-56 OVW 120 % O O O
Level 7.2
P3-00.

Communication Parameter
PT S T Section
P3-00 ADR Address Setting 0x7F N/A O O O 8.2
P3-01 BRT Transmission Speed 0x0203 bps O O O 8.2
P3-02 PTL Communication Protocol 6 N/A O O O 8.2
P3-03 FLT Communication Error Disposal 0 N/A O O O 8.2
P3-04 CWD Communication Time Out 0 sec O O O 8.2
P3-05 CMM Communication Mechanism 0 N/A O O O 8.2
Control Switch of Digital Input
P3-06 SDI 0 N/A O O O 8.2
(DI)
Communication Response
P3-07 CDT 0 1ms O O O 8.2
Delay Time
P3-08 MNS Monitor Mode 0000 N/A O O O 8.2
P3-00.

Diagnosis Parameter
PT S T Section
P4-00 ASH1 Fault Record (N) 0 N/A O O O 4.4.1
P4-01 ASH2 Fault Record (N-1) 0 N/A O O O 4.4.1
P4-05 JOG Servo Motor Jog Control 20 r/min O O O 4.4.2
P4-06 FOT Digital Output Register 0 N/A O O O 4.4.4
4.4.5
P4-07 ITST Multi-function of Digital Input 0 N/A O O O
8.2
P4-08 PKEY Input Status of the Drive Panel N/A N/A O O O -
P4-09 MOT Digital Output Status N/A N/A O O O 4.4.6
P4-10 CEN Adjustment Selection 0 N/A O O O -
Analog Speed Input Offset Factory
P4-11 SOF1 N/A O O O -
Adjustment 1 Setting
Analog Speed Input Offset Factory
P4-12 SOF2 N/A O O O -
Analog Torque Input Offset Factory
P4-14 TOF2 N/A O O O -
Analog Torque Input Offset Factory
P4-15 COF1 N/A O O O -
Current Detector (V1 Phase) Factory
Offset Adjustment Setting
Current Detector (V2 Phase) Factory
Current Detector (W1 Phase) Factory
IGBT NTC Adjustment Factory
P4-19 TIGB N/A O O O -
Detection Level Setting
Offset Adjustment Value of
P4-20 DOF1 0 mV O O O 6.4.4
Analog Monitor Output (MON1)
Offset Adjustment Value of
P4-21 DOF2 0 mV O O O 6.4.4
Analog Monitor Output (MON2)
P4-22 SAO Analog Speed Input Offset 0 mV O -
P4-23 TAO Analog Torque Input Offset 0 mV O -
P3-00.

7.3 Parameter Description
P0-xx Monitor Parameters

Address: 0000H
P0-00 VER Firmware Version
0001H
Operation Related Section: N/A
Interface:
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: -
Range: -
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: This parameter only shows the firmware version of the servo
drive.
Alarm Code Display of Drive Address: 0002H

P0-01 ALE
(Seven-segment Display) 0003H
Interface: 11.1, 11.2, 11.3
Default: -
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: -
Range: 0 ~ 0
It only can be set to 0 to clear the alarm
(Same as DI.ARST).
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: BCD
Settings: Hexadecimal format: displays the alarm code
The alarm code is hexadecimal data but displayed in BCD
format.
Alarm of Servo Drive
001: Over current
002: Over voltage
003: Under voltage (In default setting, the alarm occurs only
when the voltage is not enough in Servo ON status; In Servo
ON status, when it applies to power R, S, T, the alarm still
will not be cleared. Please refer to P2-66.)
004: Motor combination error (The drive corresponds to the
wrong motor)
005: Regeneration error
006: Overload
007: Over speed

008: Abnormal pulse command

009: Excessive deviation of position command
010: Reserved
011: Encoder error (The servo drive cannot connect to the
encoder because of disconnection or abnormal wiring)
012: Adjustment error
013: Emergency stop
014: Reverse limit error
015: Forward limit error
016: IGBT overheat
017: Abnormal EEPROM
018: Abnormal signal output
019: Serial communication error
020: Serial communication time out
021: Reserved
022: Main circuit power lack phase
023: Early warning for overload
024: Encoder initial magnetic field error
025: The internal of the encoder is in error
026: Unreliable internal data of the encoder
030: Motor crash error
031: Incorrect wiring of the motor power line, U, V, W, GND
035: Encoder temperature exceeds the protective range
048: Excessive encoder output error
067: Encoder temperature warning
083: Servo drive outputs excessive current
085: Regeneration error
099: DSP firmware upgrade
555: System failure
880: System failure
Address: 0004H
P0-02 STS Drive Status
0005H
Interface: Table 7.2
Default: 00
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: -
Range: 0 ~ 18

Data Size: 16-bit

Format: Decimal
Settings: 00: Motor feedback pulse number (after the scaling of
electronic gear ratio) [user unit]
01: Input pulse number of pulse command (after the scaling of
electronic gear ratio) [user unit]
02: Deviation between control command pulse and feedback
pulse number [user unit]
03:The number of motor feedback pulse (encoder unit, 160000
pulse/rev) [pulse]
04: Input pulse number of pulse command (before the scaling of
electronic gear ratio) [pulse]
05: Position error counts [pulse]
06: Input frequency of pulse command [Kpps]
07: Motor speed [r/min]
08: Speed command input [Volt]
09: Speed command input [r/min]
10: Torque command input [Volt]
11: Torque command input [%]
12: Average load [%]
13: Peak load [%]
14: Main circuit voltage [Volt]
15: Motor inertia rattio [0.1times]
16: IGBT temperature
17: The frequency of resonance suppression[Hz]
18: The distance from the current position to Z. The range of the
value is between -5000 and +5000.
The interval of two Z-phase pulse command is 10000 pulse.

112: Communication quality
Fault Rate of Communication Communication Quality

Communication error occurs for 7-9 times consecutively 3 (inferior)
Communication error occurs for 5-6 times consecutively 2 (poor)
Communication error occurs for 3-4 times consecutively 1 (medium)
Communication error occurs less than 2 times 0 (good)
consecutively

Address: 0006H
P0-03 MON Analog Monitor Output
0007H
Interface: 6.6.3
Default: 00
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: -
Range: 00 ~ 77
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
MON1,
MON2
Description
Setting
Value
0 Motor speed (+/-8 Volts/Max. speed)
1 Motor torque (+/-8 Volts/Max. torque)
2 Pulse command frequency (+8 Volts4.5Mpps)
Speed command (+/-8 Volts/ Max. speed
3
command)
Torque command (+/-8 Volts/Max. torque
4
command)
5 VBUS voltage (+/-8 Volts450V)
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
NOTE Please refer to parameter P1-04, P1-05 for proportional setting

of analog output voltage.
For example: P0-03 = 01 (MON1 is the analog output of motor

speed; MON2 is the analog output of motor torque)

MON1 output voltage 8 (unitVolts)
.
MON2 output voltage 8 (unit: Volts)

.
Address: 0008H
P0-04 Reserved
0009H

Address: 000AH
P0-05 Reserved
000BH
Address: 000CH
P0-06 Reserved
000DH
Address: 000EH
P0-07 Reserved
000FH
Address: 0010H
P0-08 TSON Servo Startup Time
0011H
Interface:
Default: 0
Control
-
Mode:
Unit: Hour
Range: High Word: 0 ~ 65535
Low Word: 0 ~ 65535
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: High Word: Servo enable time
Low Word: Servo power on time
Address: 0012H
P0-09 CM1 Status Monitor Register 1
0013H
Interface: 4.3.5
Default: -
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: -
Range: -
Data Size: 32-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: The setting value which is set by P0-17 should be monitored via
P0-09.
For example, if P0-17 is set to 3, when accessing P0-09, it obtains
the total feedback pulse number of motor encoder. For MODBUS
communication, two 16bit data, 0012H and 0013H will be read as
a 32bit data; (0013H : 0012H) = (Hi-wordLow-word). Set P0-02 to
23, the panel displays VAR-1 first, and then shows the content of
P0-09.

Address: 0014H
0015H
Interface: 4.3.5
Default: -
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: -
Range: -
Data Size: 32-bit
Format: Decimal
P0-10. Set P0-02 to 24, the panel displays VAR-2 first, and then
shows the content of P0-10.
Address: 0016H
0017H
Interface: 4.3.5
Default: -
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: -
Range: -
Data Size: 32-bit
Format: Decimal
Address: 0018H
0019H
Interface: 4.3.5
Default: -
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: -
Range: -
Data Size: 32-bit
Format: Decimal

Address: 001AH
001BH
Interface: 4.3.5
Default: -
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: -
Range: -
Data Size: 32-bit
Format: Decimal
P0-13.
Address: 001CH
P0-14 Reserved
001DH
Address: 001EH
P0-15 Reserved
001FH
Address: 0020H
P0-16 Reserved
0021H
Address: 0022H
P0-17 CM1A Status Monitor Register 1 Selection
0023H
Interface:
Default: 0
Control
-
Mode:
Unit: -
Range: 0 ~ 18
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: Please refer to P0-02 for its setting value.
For example:
If P0-17 is set to 07, then reading P0-09 means readingMotor
speed (r/min) .
Address: 0024H
0025H
Interface:
Default: 0
Control
-
Mode:
Unit: -
Range: 0 ~ 18

Data Size: 16-bit

Format: Decimal
Address: 0026H
0027H
Interface:
Default: 0
Control
-
Mode:
Unit: -
Range: 0 ~ 18
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Address: 0028H
0029H
Interface:
Default: 0
Control
-
Mode:
Unit: -
Range: 0 ~ 18
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Address: 002AH
002BH
Interface:
Default: 0
Control
-
Mode:
Unit: -
Range: 0 ~ 18
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Address: 002CH
P0-22 Reserved (Do Not Use)
002DH

Address: 002EH
002FH
Address: 0030H
0031H
Address: 0058H
P0-44 PCMN Status Monitor Register (for PC Software)
0059H
Interface:
Default: 0x0
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: -
Range: determined by the communication
address of the designated parameter
Data Size: 32-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: Same as parameter P0-09
Status Monitor Register Selection (for PC Address: 005AH

P0-45 PCMNA
Software) 005BH
Interface: 4.3.5
Default: 0x0
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: -
Range: 0~127
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: Same as parameter P0-17
Address: 005CH
P0-46 SVSTS Servo Output Status Display
005DH
Interface:
Default: 0
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: -
Range: 0x00 ~ 0xFF
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Hexadecimal
Settings: Bit0: SRDY (Servo is ready)
Bit1: SON (Servo On)

Bit2: ZSPD (Zero speed detection)

Bit3: TSPD (Target speed reached)
Bit4: TPOS (Target position reached)
Bit5: TQL (Torque limiting)
Bit6: ALRM (Servo alarm)
Bit7: BRKR (Brake control output)
Bit9: OLW (Early warning for overload)
Bit10: WARN (When Servo warning,CW, CCW, EMGS, under
voltage, Communication error, etc, occurs, DO is ON)
Bit11 ~ Bit15: Reserved

P1-xx Basic Parameters

Address: 0100H
P1-00 PTT External Pulse Input Type
0101H
Interface: 6.2.1
Default: 0x2
Control
PT
Mode:
Unit: -
Range: 0 ~ 1142
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
Pulse type
0: AB phase pulse (4x)
1: Clockwise (CW) + Counterclockwise (CCW) pulse
2: Pulse + Symbol
Other settings: reserved
Filter width
If the received frequency is much higher than the setting, it will be regarded as
the noise and filtered out.
Setting Low-speed Filter Frequency Setting High-speed Filter Frequency
Value (Min. pulse width *note 1) Value (Min. pulse width *note 1)
0 0.83Mpps (600ns) 0 3.33Mpps (150ns)
1 208Kpps (2.4us) 1 0.83Mpps (600ns)
2 104Kpps (4.8us) 2 416Kpps (1.2us)
3 52Kpps (9.6us) 3 208Kpps (2.4us)
4 No Filter Function 4 No Filter Function

NOTE
<150ns <150ns
150ns
150ns
Pulse Input Pulse Input
filtered signal filtered signal
When this pulse frequency is less than When this pulse frequency is less than
150 ns, this signal will be regarded as a 150 ns, this signal will be regarded as a
low-level pulse and two input pulses will high-level pulse and two input pulses will
be regarded as one input pulse. be regarded as one input pulse.
>150 ns
>150 ns
When the pulse frequencies of high-level duty

and low-level duty both are greater than 150 ns,
the signal will not be filtered (that is, the pulse
command will pass through).
If the user uses 2~4 MHz input pulse, it is suggested to set the filter value to 4. Please
note that the applicable version is: DSP version 1.005 sub10 and version above.
Note: When the signal is the high-speed pulse specification of 4 Mpps and the settings
value of the filter is 4, then pulse will not be filtered.

Logic Type
High-speed and Low-speed pulse input
Logic Pulse Type Forward Reverse
A Pulse Phase Lead A Pulse Phase Lag
AB phase
Positive Logic
pulse
0
CW and
CCW pulse
High-speed pulse input

Sign = high Sign = low
Positive
Pulse +
Logic
0
Symbol
Low-speed pulse input

Sign = low Sign = high
Positive
Pulse +
Logic
0
Symbol
For digital circuit, it uses 0 and 1 represents two status, which is high voltage and low
voltage. In Positive Logic, 1 represents high voltage and 0 represents low voltage and vice
versa in Negative Logic.
For example:
Positive Logic Negative Logic
Max. Min. time width

Pulse specification input
frequency T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6
High-speed Differential
4Mpps 62.5ns 125ns 250ns 200ns 125ns 125ns
pulse Signal
Differential
500Kpps 0.5s 1s 2s 2s 1s 1s
Low-speed Signal
pulse Open
200Kpps 1.25s 2.5s 5s 5s 2.5s 2.5s
collector

Max. input Voltage Forward

Pulse specification
frequency specification Current
Differential
High-speed pulse 4Mpps 5V < 25mA
Signal
Differential
500Kpps 2.8V ~ 3.7V < 25mA
Low-speed pulse Signal
Open collector 200Kpps 24V (Max.) < 25mA
Source of external
0: Low-speed optical coupler (CN1 Pin: PULSE, SIGN)
1: High-speed differential (CN1 Pin: HPULSE, HSIGN)
Address: 0102H
P1-01 CTL Control Mode and Output Direction
0103H
Interface: 6.1, Table 7.1
Default: 0
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: P (pulse); S (r/min, m/s); T (N-M)
Range: 00 ~ 110
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
Control mode setting

Torque output direction setting
Not in use
Control mode setting

Mode PT S T Sz Tz
Single Mode
00
01 Reserved
02
03
04
05
Dual Mode
06
07
08 Reserved
09 Reserved
0A

Singl mode:
PT: Position Control Mode (The command source is external
pulse and analog voltage which can be selected via DI.
PTAS.)
S: Speed Control Mode (The command source is the external
analog voltage and register. It can be selected via DI. SPD0,
SPD1.)
T: Torque Control Mode (The command source is the external
analog voltage and register. It can be selected via DI. TCM0,
TCM1.)
Sz: Zero Speed / Internal Speed Command
Tz: Zero Torque / Internal Torque Command
Dual Mode: It can switch mode via the external Digital Input (DI).
For example, if it is set to the dual mode of PT/S (Control mode
setting: 06), the mode can be switched via DI. S-P (Please refer to
table 7.1).
Torque Output Direction Settings
0 1
Forward
Reverse
Address: 0104H
P1-02 PSTL Speed and Torque Limit Setting
0105H
Interface: 6.6
Default: 0
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: -
Range: 00 ~ 11
Data Size: 16-bit
Display
Hexadecimal
Format:
Settings:
Disable / enable speed limit function

Disable / enable torque limit function
Not in use

Disable or Enable speed limit function

0: Disable speed limit function
1: Enable speed limit function (It is available in T mode only)
Others: Reserved
Block diagram of speed limit setting:
(0)
Vref
Speed Limit
P1-09(1) Command
P1-10(2)
P1-11(3)
SPD0
SPD1
When desire to use speed limit function, users could use parameter setting
or DI triggering. That is to say, set P1-02 to 0x0001 or trigger DI will do.
Also, users could enable or disable the limit function via DI.SPDLM, which
is a more flexible way but would need to take one DI setting. Speed limit
can be enabled by P1-02 or DI.
DI.SPD0 and DI.SPD1 are for selecting the limiting source.
Disable or Enable torque limit function

0: Disable torque limit function
1: Enable torque limit function (It is available in position and speed mode)
Other: Reserved
(0)
Tref
Torque Limit
P1-12(1) Command
P1-13(2)
P1-14(3)
TCM0
TCM1
Users could use torque limit function via parameter setting or DI triggering.
That is to say, set P1-02 to 0x0010 or trigger DI will do. Also, users could
enable or disable the limit function via DI.TRQLM, which is a more flexible
way but would need to take one DI setting. Torque limit can be enabled by
P1-02 or DI.
DI.TCM0 and DI.TCM1 are for selecting the limiting source.
Address: 0106H
P1-03 AOUT Polarity Setting of Encoder Pulse Output
0107H
Interface: 3.3.3
Default: 0
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: -
Range: 0 ~ 13
Data Size: 16-bit

Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
Not in use
Polarity of monitor analog output Position pulse outputs polarity

0: MON1(+), MON2(+) 0: Forward output
1: MON1(+), MON2(-) 1: Reverse output
2: MON1(-), MON2(+)
3: MON1(-), MON2(-)
Address: 0108H
P1-04 MON1 MON1 Analog Monitor Output Proportion
0109H
Interface: 6.4.4
Default: 100
Control
ALL
Mode:
Range: 0 ~ 100
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: Please refer to the P1-03, for the setting of analog output
selection.
Motor speed
P1-04
(Max. motor speed )
100
Motor toque
P1-05
100

Address: 010AH
P1-05 MON2 MON2 Analog Monitor Output Proportion
010BH
Interface: 6.4.4
Default: 100
Control
ALL
Mode:
Range: 0 ~ 100
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: Please refer to the P1-03, for the setting of analog output
selection.
Motor speed
P1-04
(Max. motor speed )
100
Motor toque
P1-05
100
Address: 010CH
P1-06 SFLT Analog Speed Command (Low-pass Filter)
010DH
Interface: 6.3.3
Default: 0
Control
S
Mode:
Unit: ms
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Analog Torque Command (Low-pass Address: 010EH

P1-07 TFLT
Filter) 010FH
Interface: 6.4.3
Default: 0
Control
T
Mode:
Unit: ms

Data Size: 16-bit

Display
Decimal
Format:
Smooth Constant of Position Command Address: 0110H

P1-08 PFLT
(Low-pass Filter) 0111H
Interface: 6.2.6
Default: 0
Control
PT
Mode:
Unit: 10ms
Range: 0 ~ 1000
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Internal Speed Command 1 / Internal Address: 0112H

P1-09 SP1
Speed Limit 1 0113H
Interface: 6.3.1
Default: 1000
Control
S, T
Mode:
Unit: 0.1r/min
Range: -50000 ~ +50000
Data Size: 32-bit
Format: Decimal
Example 120 = 12 r/min
Settings: Internal Speed Command 1: The setting of the first internal speed
command
Internal Speed Limit 1: The setting of the first internal speed limit

P1-10 SP2
Speed Limit 2 0115H
Interface: 6.3.1
Default: 2000
Control
S, T
Mode:
Unit: 0.1r/min
Range: -50000 ~ +50000
Data Size: 32-bit

Format: Decimal
Settings: Internal Speed Command 2The setting of the second internal
speed command
Internal Speed Limit 2: The setting of the second internal speed
limit

P1-11 SP3
Speed Limit 3 0117H
Interface: 6.3.1
Default: 3000
Control
S, T
Mode:
Unit: 0.1r/min
Range: -50000 ~ +50000
Data Size: 32-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: Internal Speed Command 3: The setting of the third internal speed
command
Internal Speed Limit 3: The setting of the third internal speed limit
Internal Torque Command 1 / Internal Address: 0118H

P1-12 TQ1
Torque Limit 1 0119H
Interface: 6.4.1
Default: 100
Control
T, P&S
Mode:
Unit: %
Range: -300 ~ +300
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: Internal Torque Command 1: The setting of the first internal torque
command
Internal Torque Limit 1: The setting of the first internal torque limit

Internal Torque Command 2 / Internal Address: 011AH

P1-13 TQ2
Torque Limit 2 011BH
Interface: 6.4.1
Default: 100
Control
T, P&S
Mode:
Unit: %
Range: -300 ~ +300
Data Size: 16-bit
Display
Decimal
Format:
Settings: Internal Torque Command 2: The setting of the second internal
torque command
Internal Torque Limit 2: The setting of the second internal torque
limit
Internal Torque Command 3 / Internal Address: 011CH

P1-14 TQ3
Torque Limit 3 011DH
Interface: 6.4.1
Default: 100
Control
T, P&S
Mode:
Unit: %
Range: -300 ~ +300
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: Internal Torque Command 3: The setting of the third internal
torque command
Internal Torque Limit 3: The setting of the third internal torque limit
Address: 011EH
P1-15 Reserved
011FH
Address: 0120H
P1-16 Reserved
0121H
Address: 0122H
P1-17 Reserved
0123H
Address: 0124H
P1-18 Reserved
0125H
Address: 0126H
P1-19 Reserved
0127H

Address: 0128H
P1-20 Reserved
0129H
Address: 012AH
P1-21 Reserved
012BH
Address: 012CH
P1-22 Reserved
012DH
Address: 012EH
P1-23 Reserved
012FH
Address: 0132H
P1-25 VSF1 Low-frequency Vibration Suppression (1)
0133H
Default: 1000
Control
PT
Mode:
Unit: 0.1Hz
Range: 10 ~ 1000
Data Size: 16bit
Format: DEC
150 = 15 Hz
Example
Settings: The setting value of the first low-frequency vibration suppression.
If P1-26 is set to 0, then it will disable the first low-frequency filter.
Low-frequency Vibration Suppression Address: 0134H

P1-26 VSG1
Gain (1) 0135H
Default: 0
Control
PT
Mode:
Unit: -
Range: 0~9 (0: Disable the first low-frequency
filter)
Data Size: 16bit
Format: DEC
Settings: The first low-frequency vibration suppression gain. The bigger
value it is, the better the position response will be. However, if the
value is set too big, the motor will not be able to smoothly
operate. It is suggested to set the value to 1.

Address: 0136H
P1-27 VSF2 Low-frequency Vibration Suppression (2)
0137H
Default: 1000
Control
PT
Mode:
Unit: 0.1Hz
Range: 10 ~ 1000
Data Size: 16bit
Format: DEC
Example 150 = 15 Hz
Settings: The setting value of the second low-frequency vibration
suppression. If P1-28 is set to 0, then it will disable the second
low-frequency filter.
Low-frequency Vibration Suppression Address: 0138H
P1-28 VSG2
Gain (2) 0139H
Default: 0
Control
PT
Mode:
Unit: -
Range: 0~9 (0: Disable the second low-frequency
filter)
Data Size: 16bit
Format: DEC
Settings: The second low-frequency vibration suppression gain. The bigger
value it is, the better the position response will be. However, if the
value is set too big, the motor will not be able to smoothly
operate. It is suggested to set the value to 1.
Address: 013EH
P1-31 Reserved
013FH
Address: 0140H
P1-32 LSTP Motor Stop Mode
0141H
Interface:
Default: 0
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: -
Range: 0 ~ 20
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:

Motor stop mode
Selection of executing dynamic brake
Not in use
Motor stop mode: When an alarm occurs, such as CWL,
CCWL, EMGS and serial communication error, it is be
in motor stop mode.
0: Stop instantly
1: Decelerate to stop
Selection of executing dynamic brake: Stop mode when servo
off or an alarm occurs.
0: Execute dynamic brake
1: Motor free run
2: Execute dynamic brake first, then execute free run until it
stops (The motor speed is slower than P1-38).
When PL and NL occurs, please refer to event time settings value
of P1-06, P1-35, P1-36 to determine the deceleration time. If the
setting is 1ms, the motor will stop instantly.
Address: 0142H
0143H
Address: 0144H
P1-34 TACC Acceleration Constant of S-Curve
0145H
Interface: 6.3.3
Default: 200
Control
S
Mode:
Unit: ms
Range: 1 ~ 20000
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: The time that speed command accelerates from 0 to 3000 r/min.
P1-34, P1-35 and P1-36, the acceleration time of speed command
from zero to the rated speed, all can be set individually.
. NOTE 1When the source of speed command is analog, and P1-36 is


Address: 0146H
P1-35 TDEC Deceleration Constant of S-Curve
0147H
Interface: 6.3.3
Default: 200
Control
S
Mode:
Unit: ms
Range: 1 ~ 20000
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: The time that speed command decelerates from 3000 r/min to 0.
P1-34, P1-35 and P1-36, the deceleration time of speed
command from the rated speed to zero, all can be set individually.

Acceleration / Deceleration Constant of Address: 0148H

P1-36 TSL
S-curve 0149H
Interface: 6.3.3
Default: 0
Control
S
Mode:
Unit: ms
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: Acceleration / Deceleration Constant of S-Curve
P1-34: Set the acceleration time of acceleration / deceleration of

trapezoid-curve
P1-35: Set the deceleration time of acceleration / deceleration of
trapezoid-curve
P1-36: Set the smoothing time of S-curve acceleration and
deceleration
P1-34, P1-35 and P1-36 can be set individually.
1)When the source of speed command is analog, and P1-36 is
NOTE

Inertia Ratio and Load Weight Ratio to Address: 014AH

P1-37 GDR
Servo Motor 014BH
Interface:
Default: 1.0 10
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: 1 times 0.1 times
Range: 0.0 ~ 200.0 0 ~ 2000
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: One-digit Decimal
Example: 1.5 = 1.5 times 15 = 1.5 times
Settings: Inertia ratio to servo motor (rotary motor)
(J_load / J_motor)
Among them:
J_motor: Rotor inertia of the servo motor
J_load: Total equivalent of inertia of external mechanical load.
Address: 014CH
P1-38 ZSPD Zero Speed Range Setting
014DH
Default: 10.0 100
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: 1 r/min 0.1 r/min
Range: 0.0 ~ 200.0 0 ~ 2000
Data Size: 16-bit
Example: 1.5 = 1.5 r/min 15 = 1.5 r/min
Settings: Setting the output range of zero-speed signal (ZSPD). When the
forward / reverse speed of the motor is slower than the setting
value, the digital output will be enabled.
Address: 014EH
P1-39 SSPD Target Motor Detection Level
014FH
Default: 3000
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: r/min
Range: 0 ~ 5000
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal

Settings: When the target speed is reached, DO (TSPD) is enabled. It

means when the motor speed in forward / reverse direction is
higher than the setting value, the target speed is reached and
enables DO.
Address: 0150H
P1-40 VCM Max. Output of Analog Speed Command
0151H
Interface: 6.3.4
Control
S, T
Mode:
Unit: r/min
Range: 0 ~ 10000
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: Maximum Speed of Analog Speed Command:
In speed mode, the analog speed command inputs the swing
speed setting of the max. voltage (10V).
For example, if the setting is 3000, when the external voltage
input is 10V, it means the speed control command is 3000r/min. If
the external voltage input is 5V, then the speed control command
is 1500r/min.
Speed control command = input voltage value x setting value10
In position or torque mode, analog speed limit inputs the swing
speed limit setting of the max. voltage (10V).
Speed limit command = input voltage value x setting value10
Address: 0152H
P1-41 TCM Max. Output of Analog Torque Command
0153H
Interface: 6.4.4
Default: 100
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: %
Range: 0 ~ 1000
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: Maximum Output of Analog Torque Speed:
In torque mode, the analog torque command inputs the torque
setting of the max. voltage (10V). When the default setting is 100,
if the external voltage inputs 10V, it means the torque control
command is 100% rated torque. If the external voltage inputs 5V,

then the torque control command is 50% rated torque.

Torque control command = input voltage value x setting value10
(%)
In speed, PT and PR mode, the analog torque limit inputs the
torque limit setting of the max. voltage (10V).
Torque limit command = input voltage value x setting value10
(%)
Address: 0154H
P1-42 MBT1 Enable Delay Time of Brake
0155H
Interface: 6.5.5
Default: 0
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: ms
Range: 0 ~ 1000
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: Set the delay time from servo ON to activate the signal of
mechanical brake (BRKR).
Address: 0156H
P1-43 MBT2 Disable Delay Time of Brake
0157H
Interface: 6.5.5
Default: 0
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: ms
Range: -1000 ~ +1000
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: Set the delay time from servo OFF to switch off the signal of brake
(BRKR).

NOTE 1If the delay time of P1-43 has not finished yet and the motor
speed is slower than P1-38, the signal of brake (BRKR) will be
disabled.
2If the delay time of P1-43 is up and the motor speed is higher
than P1-38, the signal of brake (BRKR) will be disabled.
3 When Servo OFF due to Alarm (except AL022) or emergency,
the setting of P1-43 is equivalent to 0 if P1-43 is set to a
negative value.
Address: 0158H
P1-44 GR1 Gear Ratio (Numerator) (N1)
0159H
Default: 16
Control
PT
Mode:
Unit: pulse
Range: 1 ~ (226-1)
Data Size: 32-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: Please refer to P2-60~P2-62 for the setting of multiple gear ratio
(numerator).
NOTE 1. In PT mode, the setting value can be changed when Servo

ON.
Address: 015AH
P1-45 GR2 Gear Ratio (Denominator) (M)
015BH
Default: 10
Control
PT
Mode:
Unit: pulse
Range: 1 ~ (231-1)
Data Size: 32-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: If the setting is wrong, the servo motor will easily have sudden
unintended acceleration.
Please follow the rules for setting:
The setting of pulse input:

Range of command pulse input: 150NxM25600 (x=1, 2,

3, 4)
NOTE 1 The setting value cannot be changed when Servo ON in PT

mode.
Address: 015CH
P1-46 GR3 Pulse Number of Encoder Output
015DH
Interface:
Default: 2500
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: pulse
Range: 4 ~ 40000
Data Size: 32-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: This parameter is used to set the number of
single-phase pulse output per revolution.
Selection of pulse output:
1) Set P2-66 to 0x000. The setting of P1-46 is the
number of single-phase pulse output.
2) Set P2-66 to 0x8000. The setting of P1-46 is the

pulse number after dividing by quadrupler frequency
NOTE The following circumstances might exceed the max. allowable

input pulse frequency and occurs AL018:
1. Encoder error
2. Motor speed is above the value set by parameter P1-76

Address: 015EH
P1-47 SPOK Speed Reached (DO:SP_OK) Range
015FH
Interface:
Default: 10
Control
S, Sz
Mode:
Unit: r/min
Range: 0 ~ 300
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: When the deviation between speed command and motor
feedback speed is smaller than this parameter, then the digital
output DO.SP_OK (DO code is 0x19) is ON.
1. Speed Command: It is the command issued by the user

(without acceleration / deceleration), not the one of front end
speed circuit.
Source: Analog voltage and register
2. Feedback Speed: The actual speed of the motor and have gone
through the filter.
3. Obtain the absolute Value
4. DO.SP_OK will be ON when the absolute value of speed error is
smaller than P1-47, or it will be OFF. If P1-47 is 0, DO.SP_OK is
always OFF.
Address: 0160H
P1-48 Reserved
0161H
Address: 0162H
P1-49 Reserved
0163H
Address: 0164H
P1-50 Reserved
0165H
Address: 0166H
P1-51 Reserved
0167H

Address: 0168H
P1-52 RES1 Regenerative Resistor Value
0169H
Interface: 6.6.3
Default: See the table below
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: Ohm
Range: 10 ~ 750
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings:
Model Default
750 W models 100
1 kW to 3 kW models 40
Address: 016AH
P1-53 RES2 Regenerative Resistor Capacity
016BH
Interface: 6.6.3
Default: See the table below
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: Watt
Range: 30 ~ 3000
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings:
Model Default
750 W models 60 W
1 kW to 3 kW models 60 W
Address: 016CH
P1-54 PER Position Completed Range
016DH
Default: 1600
Control
PT
Mode:
Unit: pulse
Range: 0 ~ 1280000
Data Size: 32-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: In position mode (PT), if the deviation pulse number is smaller
than the setting range (the setting value of parameter P1-54),

DO.TPOS is ON.
Address: 016EH
P1-55 MSPD Maximum Speed Limit
016FH
Interface:
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: r/min
Range: 0 ~ Max. speed
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: The default of the max. speed of servo motor is set to the rated
speed.
Address: 0170H
P1-56 OVW Output Overload Warning Level
0171H
Interface:
Default: 120
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: %
Range: 0 ~ 120
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: The setting value is 0 ~ 100, if the servo motor continuously
outputs the load and is higher than the setting proportion (P1-56),
the early warning for overload (DO is set to 10, OLW) will occur.
If the setting value is over 100, it will disable this function.
Motor Crash Protection (Torque Address: 0172H

P1-57 CRSHA
Percentage) 0173H
Interface:
Default: 0
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: %
Range: 0 ~ 300
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: Setup protection level (for the percentage of rated torque, set the
value to 0 means to disable the function, set the value to 1 or
number above means to enable the function)

Address: 0174H
P1-58 CRSHT Motor Crash Protection Time
0175H
Interface:
Default: 1
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: ms
Range: 0 ~ 1000
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: Setup the protection time:
When it reaches the level, AL.030 occurs after exceeding the
protection time.
NOTE This function is only suitable for non-contactable application, such

as electric discharge machines. (Please setup P1-37 correctly).
Address: 0176H
P1-59 MFLT Analog Speed Command
0177H
Interface:
Default: 0.0 0
Control
S
Mode:
Unit: 1 ms 0.1 ms
Range: 0.0 ~ 4.0 0 ~ 40
(0: Disabled) (0: Disabled)
Data Size: 16-bit
Example: 1.5 = 1.5 ms 15 = 1.5 ms
Settings: (Moving filter)
0: Disabled
P1-06 is low-pass filter and P1-59 is moving filter. The difference
step command; while the low-pass filter brings better smooth
effect to command end.
Therefore, it is suggested that if the speed loop receives the
command from the controller for forming the position control loop,
then low-pass filter can be used. If it is only for the speed control,
then it should use Moving Filter for better smoothing.

Original step analog speed command
Command that has

gone through moving
filter
Address: 0178H
P1-60 Reserved
0179H
Address: 017AH
P1-61 Reserved
017BH
Address: 017CH
P1-62 FRCL Friction Compensation
017DH
Interface:
Default: 0
Control
PT, S
Mode:
Unit: %
Range: 0 ~ 100
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: The level of friction compensation (the percentage of rated torque.
Set the value to 0 means to disable the function; set the value to 1
or number above means to enable it.)
Address: 017EH
P1-63 FRCT Friction Compensation
017FH
Interface:
Default: 0
Control
PT, S
Mode:
Unit: ms
Range: 0 ~ 1000
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: Setup smoothing constant of friction compensation.
Address: 0180H
P1-64 Reserved
0181H

Address: 0182H
P1-65 Reserved
0183H
Address: 0184H
P1-66 Reserved
0185H
Address: 0186H
P1-67 Reserved
0187H
Address: 0188H
P1-68 PFLT2 Position Command Moving Filter 1
0189H
Interface:
Default: 4
Control
PT
Mode:
Unit: ms
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Moving Filter can activate smooth function in the beginning and
the end of step command, but it will delay the command.
Address: 018AH
P1-69 Reserved
018BH
Address: 018CH
P1-70 Reserved
018DH
Address: 018EH
P1-71 Reserved
018FH
Address: 0190H
P1-72 Reserved
0191H
Address: 0192H
P1-73 Reserved
0193H
Address: 0194H
P1-74 Reserved
0195H

Address: 0196H
P1-75 Reserved
0197H
Max. Rotation of Encoder Output Setting Address: 0198H

P1-76 AMSPD
(OA, OB) 0199H
Interface: P1-46
Default: 5500
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: r/min
Range: 0 ~ 6000
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: According to the real application, this parameter is set for the
maximum speed and the servo drive will generate smooth
function automatically for encoder output signals.
When the value is set to 0, the function is disabled.
Address: 019AH
P1-77 PFLT3 Position Command Moving Filter 2
019BH
Interface:
Default: 4
Control
PT
Mode:
Unit: ms
Range: 0 ~ 100
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Moving Filter can activate smooth function in the beginning and
the end of step command, but it will delay the command.

P2-xx Extension Parameters

Address: 0200H
P2-00 KPP Position Loop Gain
0201H
Interface: 6.2.5
Default: 35
Control
PT
Mode:
Unit: rad/s
Range: 0 ~ 2047
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: When the value of position loop gain is increased, the position
response can be enhanced and the position error can be reduced.
If the value is set too big, it may easily cause vibration and noise.
Address: 0202H
P2-01 PPR Switching Rate of Position Loop Gain
0203H
Interface: 6.2.5
Default: 100
Control
PT
Mode:
Unit: %
Range: 10 ~ 500
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: Switch the changing rate of position loop gain according to the
gain-switching condition.
Address: 0204H
P2-02 PFG Position Feed Forward Gain
0205H
Interface: 6.2.5
Default: 50
Control
PT
Mode:
Unit: %
Range: 0 ~ 100
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: If the position command is changed smoothly, increasing the gain
value can reduce the position error.
If the position command is not changed smoothly, decreasing the
gain value can tackle the problem of mechanical vibration.

Smooth Constant of Position Feed Address: 0206H

P2-03 PFF
Forward Gain 0207H
Interface:
Default: 5
Control
PT
Mode:
Unit: ms
Range: 2 ~ 100
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: If the position command is changed smoothly, decreasing the
value can reduce the position error. If the position command is not
changed smoothly, increasing the value can tackle the problem of
mechanical vibration.
Address: 0208H
P2-04 KVP Speed Loop Gain
0209H
Interface: 6.3.6
Default: 500
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: rad/s
Range: 0 ~ 8191
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: Increase the value of speed loop gain can enhance the speed
response. However, if the value is set too big, it would easily
cause resonance and noise.
Address: 020AH
P2-05 SPR Speed Loop Gain Switching Rate
020BH
Interface:
Default: 100
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: %
Range: 10 ~ 500
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: Switch the changing rate of speed loop gain according to the gain
switching condition.

Address: 020CH
P2-06 KVI Speed Integral Compensation
020DH
Interface: 6.3.6
Default: 100
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: rad/s
Range: 0 ~ 1023
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: Increasing the value of speed integral compensation can enhance
speed response and diminish the deviation of speed control.
However, if the value is set too big, it would easily cause
resonance and noise.
Address: 020EH
P2-07 KVF Speed Feed Forward Gain
020FH
Interface: 6.3.6
Default: 0
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: %
Range: 0 ~ 100
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: When the speed control command runs smoothly, increasing the
gain value can reduce the speed command error. If the command
does not run smoothly, decreasing the gain value can reduce the
mechanical vibration during operation.
Address: 0210H
P2-08 PCTL Special Parameter Write-in
0211H
Interface:
Default: 0
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 65535
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: Special parameter write-in:

Parameter
Function
code
10 Reset the parameter (Apply to the power
again after reset)
20 P4-10 is writable
22 P4-11~P4-21are writable
406 Enable forced DO mode
400 When forced DO mode is enabled, it can

switch back to the normal DO mode.
Password protective setting:
1. Enter 5-digit number, press the same password again (The top
digit should be 1 at least.).
2. Re-power on the servo drive, the protective funciton will be
activated immediately.
Parameter setting after setting up the password:
When entering the correct password, the parameter can be set.
Clear the password: After entering the correct password, please
enter 0 twice continuously.
Address: 0212H
P2-09 DRT DI Debouncing Time
0213H
Interface:
Default: 2
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: 2ms
Range: 0 ~ 20
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Example: 4 = 8 ms
Settings: When the environmental noise is big, increasing the setting value
can enhance the control stability. However, if the value is set too
big, the response time will be influenced.
Address: 0214H
P2-10 DI1 DI1 Funcitonal Planning
0215H
Default: 101
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 0x015F
(The last two codes are DI code)

Data Size: 16-bit

Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
Input function selection

Input contact
Not in use
Input funciton selection: Please refer to table 7.1
Input contact: a or b contact
0: Set the input contact as normally closed (b contact)
1: Set the input contact as normally opened (a contact)
(P2-10 ~ P2-17 and P2-36) The setting value of function
programmed
When parameters are modified, please re-start the servo drive
to ensure it can work normally.
Note: Parameter P3-06 is used to set how digital inputs (DI)
accepts commands, through external terminal or the
communication which determined by P4-07.
Address: 0216H
0217H
Default: 104
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 0x015F
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Hexadecimal
Settings: Please refer to the description of P2-10
Address: 0218H
0219H
Default: 116
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 0x015F
Data Size: 16-bit

Format: Hexadecimal
Address: 021AH
021BH
Default: 117
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 0x015F
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Hexadecimal
Address: 021CH
021DH
Default: 102
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 0x015F
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Hexadecimal
Address: 021EH
021FH
Default: 22
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 0x015F
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Hexadecimal
Settings: Refer to P2-10 for explanation.

Address: 0220H
0221H
Default: 23
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 0x015F
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Hexadecimal
Address: 0222H
0223H
Default: 21
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 0x015F
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Hexadecimal
Address: 0224H
P2-18 DO1 DO1 Funcitonal Planning
0225H
Default: 101
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 0x013F
(The last two codes are DO code)
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
Output function selection

Output contact
Not in use

Output funciton selection: Please refer to table 7.2.

Output contact: a or b contact
0: Set Set the output contact as normally closed (b contact)
1: Set the output contact as normally opened (a contact)
(P2-18 ~ P2-22 and P2-37) The setting value of function
programmed
When parameters are modified, please re-start the servo
drive to ensure it can work normally.
Address: 0226H
0227H
Default: 103
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 0x013F
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Hexadecimal
Address: 0228H
0229H
Default: 109
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 0x013F
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Hexadecimal
Address: 022AH
022BH
Default: 105
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A

Range: 0 ~ 0x013F
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Hexadecimal
Address: 022CH
022DH
Default: 7
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 0x013F
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Hexadecimal
Address: 022EH
P2-23 NCF1 Resonance Suppression (Notch Filter) (1)
022FH
Interface: 6.2.5
Default: 1000
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: Hz
Range: 50 ~ 2000
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: The first setting value of resonance frequency. If P2-24 is set to 0,
this function is disabled. P2-43 and P2-44 are the second Notch
filter.
Resonance Suppression (Notch filter) Address: 0230H

P2-24 DPH1
Interface: 6.3.7
Default: 0
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: dB
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal

Settings: The first resonance suppression (notch filter) attenuation rate.

disabled.
Low-pass Filter of Resonance Address: 0232H

P2-25 NLP
Suppression 0233H
Interface: 6.3.7
Default: 0.2 (1kW and below 2 (1kW and below
models) or 0.5 (other models) or 5 (other
models) models)
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: 1ms 0.1ms
Range: 0.0 ~ 100.0 0 ~ 1000
Data Size: 16-bit
Example: 1.5 = 1.5 msec 15 = 1.5 msec
Settings: Set the low-pass filter of resonance suppression. When the value
is set to 0, the function of low-pass filter is disabled.
Address: 0234H
P2-26 DST Anti-Interference Gain
0235H
Interface:
Default: 0
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: 0.001
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: Increasing the value of this parameter can increase the damping
of speed loop. It is suggested to set P2-26 equals to the value of
P2-06. If users desire to adjust P2-26, please follow the rules
below.
1. In speed mode, increase the value of this parameter can
reduce speed overshoot.
2. In position mode, decrease the value of this parameter can
reduce position overshoot.

Address: 0236H
P2-27 GCC Gain Switching and Switching Selection
0237H
Interface:
Default: 0
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 4
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
Gain Switching Condition Settings:
0: Disable gain switching function.
1: The signal of gain switching (GAINUP) is ON.
2: In position control mode, the position error is bigger than
the value of P2-29.
3: The frequency of position command is bigger than the
value of P2-29.
4: When the speed of servo motor is faster than the value of
P2-29.
5: The signal of gain switching (GAINUP) is OFF.
6: In position control mode, the position error is smaller than
the value of P2-29.
7: When the frequency of position command is smaller than
the value of P2-29.
8: When the speed of servo motor is slower than the value of
P2-29.
Gain Switching Control Settings
0: Gain switching
1: Integrator switching, P PI
Setting
Control mode P Control mode P S Status
Value
P2-00 x 100%
P2-04 x 100% Before switching
P2-04 x 100%
0
P2-00 x P2-01
P2-04 x P2-05 After switching
P2-04 x P2-05
P2-06 x 0%
Before switching
P2-26 x 0%
1
P2-06 x 100%
After switching
P2-26 x 100%

Address: 0238H
P2-28 GUT Gain Switching Time Constant
0239H
Interface:
Default: 10
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: 10ms
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Example: 15 = 150 msec
Settings: It is for switching the smooth gain. (0: disable this function)
Address: 023AH
P2-29 GPE Gain Switching
023BH
Interface:
Default: 160000
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: pulse, Kpps, r/min
Range: 0 ~ 3840000
Data Size: 32-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: The setting of gain switching (Pulse error, Kpps, r/min) is
determined by the selection of gain switching (P2-27).
Address: 023CH
P2-30 INH Auxiliary Function
023DH
Interface:
Default: 0
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: -8 ~ +8
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: 0: Disable all functions described below
1: Force to Servo On the software
2~4: (reserved)
5: This setting allows the written parameters not retain after
power off. When the data is no need to save, it can avoid the
parameters continuously writing into EEPROM and shortening
the lifetime of EEPROM.

Setting this parameter is a must when using communication

control.
NOTE Please set the value to 0 in normal operation. The value returns to
0 automatically after re-power on.
Speed Loop Frequency Response Setting Address: 023EH

P2-31 AUT1
in Auto and Semi-auto Mode 023FH
Interface: 5.6, 6.3.6
Default: 80
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: Hz
Range: 1 ~ 1000
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Hexadecimal
Settings: 1~50Hz: Low stiffness, low response
51~250Hz: Medium stiffness, medium response
251~850Hz: High stiffness, high respons
NOTE 1) According to the speed loop setting of P2-31, the servo drive
sets the position loop response automatically.
2) The function is enabled via parameter P2-32. Please refer to
Chapter 5.6 for corresponding bandwidth size of the setting
value.
Address: 0240H
P2-32 AUT2 Tuning Mode Selection
0241H
Interface: 5.6, 6.3.6
Default: 0
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 2
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Hexadecimal
Settings: 0: Manual mode
1: Auto Mode (Continuous adjustment)
2: Semi-Auto Mode (Non-continuous adjustment)
Relevant description of manual mode setting :
When P2-32 is set to 0, parameters related to gain control, such
as P2-00, P2-02, P2-04, P2-06, P2-07, P2-25 and P2-26, all can
be set by the user.
When switching mode from auto or semi-auto to manual,
parameters about gain will be updated automatically.
Relevant description of auto mode setting:

Continue to estimate the system inertia, save the inertia ratio to

P1-37 every 30 minutes automatically and refer to the stiffness
and bandwidth setting of P2-31.
1. Set the system to manual mode 0 from auto 1 or semi-auto 2,
the system will save the estimated inertia value to P1-37
automatically and set the corresponding parameters.
2. Set the system to auto mode 1 or semi-auto mode 2 from
manual mode 0, please set P1-37 to the appropriate value.
3. Set the system to manual mode 0 from auto mode 1, P2-00,
P2-04 and P2-06 will be modified to the corresponding
parameters of auto mode.
4. Set the system to manual mode 0 from semi-auto mode 2,
P2-00, P2-04, P2-06, P2-25 and P2-26 will be modified to the
corresponding parameters of semi-auto mode.
Relevant description of semi-auto mode setting:
1. When the system inertia is stable, the value of P2-33 will be 1
and the system stops estimating. The inertia value will be
saved to P1-37 automatically. When switching mode to
semi-auto mode (from manual or auto mode), the system
starts to estimate again.
2. When the system inertia is over the range, the value of P2-33
will be 0 and the system starts to estimate and adjust again.
Address: 0242H
P2-33 AUT3 Semi-Auto Inertia Adjustment
0243H
Interface:
Default: 0
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 1
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings:
Semi-auto setting
Reserved
Not in use
Semi-auto Setting:
1: It means the inertia estimation in semi-auto mode is
completed. The inertia value can be accessed via P1-37.
0: 1. When the display is 0, it means the inertia adjustment is
not completed and is adjusting.

2. When the setting is 0, it means the inertia adjustment is

not completed and is adjusting.
Address: 0244H
P2-34 SDEV The Condition of Overspeed Warning
0245H
Interface:
Default: 5000
Control
S
Mode:
Unit: r/min
Range: 1 ~ 6000
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: The setting of over speed warning in servo drive error display
(P0-01)
Condition of Excessive Position Control Address: 0246H

P2-35 PDEV
Deviation Warning 0247H
Interface:
Default: 480000
Control
PT
Mode:
Unit: pulse
Range: 1 ~ 16000000
Data Size: 32-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: The setting of excessive position control deviation warning in
servo drive error display (P0-01).
Address: 0248H
P2-36 DI9 Extended EDI9 Functional Planning
0249H
Default: 0
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 0x015F
(The last two codes are EDI code)
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:

Input function selection

Input contact
Not in use
Input function selection: Please refer to table 7.1
Input contact: a or b contact
0: Set the input contact as normally closed (b contact)
1: Set the input contact as normally opened (a contact)
Address: 024AH
024BH
Default: 7
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 0x013F
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Hexadecimal
Address: 024CH
P2-38 Reserved
024DH
Address: 024EH
P2-39 Reserved
024FH
Address: 0250H
P2-40 Reserved
0251H
Address: 0252H
P2-41 Reserved
0253H
Address: 0254H
P2-42 Reserved
0255H
Address: 0256H
0257H
Interface: 6.3.7
Default: 1000
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: Hz
Range: 50 ~ 2000

Data Size: 16-bit

Format: Decimal
Settings: The second setting value of resonance frequency. If P2-44 is set
to 0, this function is disabled. P2-23 and P2-24 are the first Notch
filter.

P2-44 DPH2
Interface: 6.3.7
Default: 0
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: dB
Range: 0 ~ 32
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: The second resonance suppression (notch filter) attenuation rate.
disabled.
Address: 025AH
025BH
Interface: 6.3.7
Default: 1000
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: Hz
Range: 50 ~ 2000
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: The third group of mechanism resonance frequency setting value.
If P2-46 is set to 0, this function will be disabled. P2-23 and P2-24
are the first group of resonance suppression (Notch filter).
Resonance Suppression (Notch Filter) Address: 025CH

P2-46 DPH3
Attenuation Rate (3) 025DH
Interface: 6.3.7
Default: 0
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: dB
Range: 0 ~ 32
Data Size: 16-bit

Display
Decimal
Format:
Settings: The third group of resonance suppression (Notch filter)
attenuation rate. Set the value to 0 to disable the function of Notch
filter.
Auto Resonance Suppression Mode Address: 025EH

P2-47 ANCF
Setting 025FH
Interface:
Default: 1
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 2
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: 0: The value of P2-43, P2-44 and P2-45, P2-46 will retain.
1: The value of P2-43, P2-44 and P2-45, P2-46 will retain after
resonance suppression.
2: Continuous resonance suppression
Description of Auto Mode Setting:
When it is set to 1: Auto resonance, the value returns to 0
automatically and saves the point of resonance suppression
when it is stable. If it is unstable, re-power on or set back to 1 for
re-estimation again.
When it is set to 2: Continuous suppression automatically. When
it is stable, the point of resonance suppression will be saved. If it
is unstable, re-power on for re-estimation.
When switching to mode 0 from mode 2 or 1, the setting of P2-43,
P2-44, P2-45 and P2-46 will be saved automatically.
Address: 0260H
P2-48 ANCL Resonance Suppression Detection Level
0261H
Interface:
Default: 100
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: 1 ~ 300%
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: (The smaller the setting value is, the more sensitive the
resonance will be.)
The setting value of P2-48 , resonance sensitivieness .

The setting value of P2-48 , resonance sensitivieness .
Address: 0262H
P2-49 SJIT Speed Detection Filter
0263H
Interface: 6.2.5
Default: 0
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: sec
Range: 0 ~ 1F
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings:
Setting Value Speed Estimation Bandwidth (Hz)
00 2500
01 2250
02 2100
03 2000
04 1800
05 1600
06 1500
07 1400
08 1300
09 1200
0A 1100
0B 1000
0C 950
0D 900
0E 850
0F 800
10 750
11 700
12 650
13 600
14 550
15 500
16 450
17 400
18 350
19 300
1A 250
1B 200
1C 175

Setting Value Speed Estimation Bandwidth (Hz)

1D 150
1E 125
1F 100
Address: 0264H
P2-50 DCLR Pulse Clear Mode
0265H
Interface:
Default: 00
Control
PT
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 11
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
For digital input setting, please refer to Table 7.1.

When set digital input (DI) as CCLR, the funciton of pulse cleasr
is effective.
If this DI is ON, the accumulative position error will be cleared to
0.
Triggering Method Settings:
0: CCLR is triggered by rising-edge
1: CCLR is triggered bu level
Function Selection Settings:
1: Clear feedback PUU
0: When this DI is on, the feedback PUU will be clear to 0.
Address: 0266H
P2-51 Reserved
0267H
Address: 0268H
P2-52 Reserved
0269H

Address: 026AH
P2-53 KPI Position Integral Compensation
026BH
Interface: 6.3.6
Default: 0
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: rad/s
Range: 0 ~ 1023
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: When increasing the value of position control integral, reducing
the position steady-state error, it may easily cause position
overshoot and noise if the value is set too big.
Address: 026CH
P2-54 Reserved
026DH
Address: 026EH
P2-55 Reserved
026FH
Address: 0270H
P2-56 Reserved
0271H
Address: 0272H
P2-57 Reserved
0273H
Address: 0274H
P2-58 Reserved
0275H
Address: 0276H
P2-59 Reserved
0277H
Address: 0278H
0279H
Interface:
Default: 16
Control
PT
Mode:
Unit: pulse
Range: 1 ~ (226-1)
Data Size: 32-bit
Display
Decimal
Format:
Settings: The numerator of electronic gear ratio can be selected via
DI.GNUM0 and DI.GNUM1 (Please refer to table 7.1). If
DI.GNUM0 and DI.GNUM1 are not set, P1-44 will automatically
be the numerator of electronic gear ratio. Please switch GNUM0
and GNUM1 in stop status to avoid the mechanical vibration.

Address: 027AH
027BH
Interface:
Default: 16
Control
PT
Mode:
Unit: pulse
Range: 1 ~ (226-1)
Data Size: 32-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: Please refer to the description of P2-60.
Address: 027CH
027DH
Interface:
Default: 16
Control
PT
Mode:
Unit: pulse
Range: 1 ~ (226-1)
Data Size: 32-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: Please refer to the description of P2-60.
Address: 027EH
P2-63 Reserved
027FH
Address: 0280H
P2-64 Reserved
0281H
Address: 0282H
P2-65 GBIT Special-bit Register
0283H
Interface:
Default: 0
Control
PT, S
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 0xFFFF
Data Size: N/A
Format: N/A
Settings:
Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0

Bit2 ~ Bit5, Bit7 and Bit14 ~ Bit15: Reserved, please set to 0.

Bit6: In PT mode, the switch of pulse error protection function
(pulse frequency is over high)
Bit6
Bit6 = 0: Normally use the function of pulse error protection
Bit6 = 1: Disable the function of pulse error protection
Bit8: U, V, W wiring error protection

Bit8
Bit8 = 1: Enable U, V, W wiring error protection
Bit9: U, V, W wiring cut-off detection

Bit9
Bit9 = 1: Enable U, W, W wiring cut-off detection
Bit 10: DI.ZCLAMP function selection
Bit10
When the following conditions are all established, the
function of ZCLAMP is enabled.
Condition 1: speed mode
Condition 2: DI. ZCLAMP is On.
Condition 3: Motor speed is slower than the value of P1-38.
Bit10 = 0: The command source is analog, ZCLAMP
function will use the analog speed command
without acceleration / deceleration processing to
judge if this function should be enabled. The
motor will be locked at the position where
ZCALMP conditions are established.

Bit10 = 0: The command source is register. ZCLAMP

function will use the register speed command with
acceleration / deceleration processing to judge if
this function is enabled. The motor will be locked
at the position where ZCALMP conditions are
established.
Bit10 = 1: The command source is analog speed command.

ZCLAMP function will use the analog speed
command without acceleration / deceleration
processing to judge if this function is enabled.
When ZCALMP conditions are established, the
motor speed decelerates to 0 through S-curve. If
not, the motor follow the analog speed command
through S-curve.

Bit10 = 1: The command source is register. ZCLAMP

function will use the register with acceleration /
deceleration processing to judge if this function is
enabled. When ZCLAMP conditions are
established, the motor speed will be set to 0.
Bit11: Pulse inhibit funciton
Bit11
Bit11 = 0: Disable NL / PL pulse input inhibit function. In PT

mode, the external position pulse command will be
input into the servo drive in any condition.
Bit11 = 1: Enable NL / PL pulse input inhibit function. In PT
mode, if NL exists, the external NL pulse will be
inhibited to input to the servo. PL pulse input will be
accepted. In PT mode, if PL exists, the external PL
pulse will be inhibited to input to the servo. NL
pulse will be accepted.
Please note: In PT mode, if NL and PL both exist, both of
them will be inhibited to input to the servo.
Bit12: Lack phase detection
Bit12
Bit12 = 0: Enable lack phase (AL022) detection
Bit12 = 1: Disable lack phase (AL022) detection
Bit13: Encoder output error detection function
Bit13
Bit13 = 0: Enable encoder output error (AL018) detection
function
Bit13 = 1: Disable encoder output error (AL018) detection
function

Address: 0284H
P2-66 GBIT2 Special-bit Register 2
0285H
Interface:
Default: 0
Control
PT, S
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 0x000F
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Hexadecimal
Settings: Special-bit Register 2:
- - - - - - - -
Bit0: Speed limit accel / decel function

The torque command source is determined by TCM0 and TCM1.
When the digital input, TQP or TQN is used, the torque
command is activated by TQP or TQN. When TQP is ON, the
torque will be output directly as the same as the command
souce. For example, when TQP is ON, if the torque command
source is analog voltage 5V and P1-41 is set to 100, it means
that the torque command is 50% rated torque until the speed is
limited. However, with the same circumstances, whenTQN is
ON, the torque command is -50% rated torque until the speed is
limited.
Speed limit function can be enabled always by P1-02. When
P1-02 is set to 0x10, the speed limit function can be enabled all
the time and the users do not need to use DI.SPDLM to switch
the function.
The speed limit command is determined by SPD0 and SPD1.
The acceleration and deceleration time is determined by P1-34,
P1-35 and P1-36.
TQP TQN
(DI Code: (DI Code: Torque Output
0x48) 0x49)
ON ON Zero torque output
ON OFF Output the torque of the command
source directly
(do not reverse the command, and
output the torque directly)
OFF ON Reverse the torque of the
command source
(reverse the command first, and
then output the torque)
OFF OFF Zero torque output

The timing charts of speed limit profile (with accel / decel

function) and torque command (TQP/TQN):
Bit1: Reserved
Bit2: Cancel latch function of low-voltage error
0: Latch function of low-voltage error: the error will not be
cleared automatically.
1: Cancel latch function of low-voltage error: the error will be
cleared automatically.
Bit7: Cancel the display of motor temperature warning
0: Display motor temperature wanring
1: Cancel the display of motor temperature warning
Bit9:
0: When AL.003 occurs, switch on DO.WARN. (DO function
0x11)
1: When AL.003 occurs, switch on (DO function 0x07)
Bit15: Selection of dncoder pulse output
0: 0x0000. The setting value of P1-46 represents the
single-phase pulse number when motor runs a cycle.
If P1-46 is set to 2,500 pulse, then the host controller will
receive 10, 000 pulse (the quadruple of the single-phase pulse
number) when motor runs a cycle.
Para. setting: P1-46=4, 2-66=0x0000
Motor runs a cycle
OA
OB

1: 0x8000. The setting value of P1-46 is the pulse number of

quadrupler frequency per cycle.
If the pulse number that host controller needs to receive is 187
pulse per cycle, then set P1-46 to 187 pulse, the host controller
will receive 187 pulse per cycle.
Para. setting: P1-46=4,P2-66=0x8000
Motor runs a cycle
OA
OB
Address: 0286H
P2-67 JSL Stable Inertia Estimating Time
0287H
Interface:
Default: 1.5 15
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: 1 times 0.1 times
Range: 0 ~ 200.0 0 ~ 2000
Data Size: 16-bit
Example: 1.5 = 1.5 times 15 = 1.5 times
Settings: In semi-auto mode, if the value of inertia estimation is smaller
than P2-67 and the status remains for a while, the system will
regard the inertia estimation as completed.

P3-xx Communication Parameters

Address: 0300H
P3-00 ADR Address Setting
0301H
Interface: 8.2
Default: 0x7F
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: 0x01 ~ 0x7F
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Hexadecimal
Settings: The communication address setting is divided into Y, X
(hexadecimal):
Display 0 0 Y X
Range - - 0~7 0~F
When using RS-232/RS-485 to communicate, one servo drive can
only set one address. The duplicate address setting will cause
abnormal communication.
This address represents the absolute address of the servo drive in
communication network. It is also applicable to RS-232/485 and
CAN bus.
When the communication address setting of MODBUS is set to
0xFF, the servo drive will automatically reply and receive data
regardless of the address. However, P3-00 cannot be set to 0xFF.
Address: 0302H
P3-01 BRT Transmission Speed
0303H
Interface: 8.2
Default: 0x0033
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: bps
Range: 0x0000 ~ 0x0055
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Hexadecimal
Settings: The setting of transmission speed is divided into Z, Y, X
(hexadecimal):
0 Z Y X
COM Port - - RS-485 RS-232
Range 0 0 0~5 0~5
Settings:
0: 4800

1: 9600
2: 19200
3: 38400
4: 57600
5: 115200
Address: 0304H
P3-02 PTL Communication Protocol
0305H
Interface: 8.2
Default: 0x0066
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: 0x0000 ~ 0x0088
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Hexadecimal
Settings: The definition of the setting value is as the followings:
0 Z Y X
Range 0 0 0~8 0~8
0: 7, N, 2 (MODBUS, ASCII)
1: 7, E, 1 (MODBUS, ASCII)
2: 7, O,1 (MODBUS, ASCII)
5: 8, O, 1 (MODBUS, ASCII)
6: 8, N, 2 (MODBUS, RTU)
7: 8, E, 1 (MODBUS, RTU)
8: 8, O, 1 (MODBUS, RTU)
Address: 0306H
P3-03 FLT Communication Error Disposal
0307H
Interface: 8.2
Default: 0
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 1
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Hexadecimal
Settings: The definition of the setting value is as the following:

0: Warning and keeps running

1: Warning and stops deceleration (The deceleration time is set to
parameter P1-32)
Address: 0308H
P3-04 CWD Communication Time Out
0309H
Interface: 8.2
Default: 0
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: sec
Range: 0 ~ 20
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: If the setting value is not 0, enable communication timeout
immediately. If it is set to 0, disable the function.
Address: 030AH
P3-05 CMM Communication Mechanism
030BH
Interface: 8.2
Default: 0
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: 0x00 ~ 0x01
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Hexadecimal
Settings: RS-232 via MOBUS communication or communicate with
ASDA-Soft
RS-232 Communication format
0: RS-232/RS485 via Modbus communication
1: RS-232 upon ASDA-Soft software
Address: 030CH
P3-06 SDI Control Switch of Digital Input (DI) 030DH
Interface: 8.2
Default: 0
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: 0x0000 ~ 0x1FFF
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Hexadecimal

Settings: The source of DI controls the switch.

Each bit of this parameter decides one input source of DI signal:
Bit0 ~ Bit8 correspond to DI1 ~ DI9.
The setting of bit is as the followings:
0: The input status is controlled by the external hardware.
1: The input status is controlled by P4-07.
For the functional planning of digital input, please refer to:
DI1 ~ DI9: P2-10 ~ P2-17 and P2-36
Address: 030EH
P3-07 CDT Communication Response Delay Time
030FH
Interface: 8.2
Default: 0
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: 1ms
Range: 0 ~ 1000
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: Delay the time of communication response from servo drive to
controller
Address: 0310H
P3-08 MNS Monitor Mode
0311H
Interface: 8.2
Default: 0000
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: refer to the description of Settings
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Hexadecimal
Settings: The setting of monitor mode is divided as H. (hexadecimal):
Word - - Low High
Function - - Monitor mode
Range 0 0 0 0~3
The status of this axis or multi-axis can be monitored by
communication. The definition of setting value is as follows:
The definition of H setting value:
3: High-speed monitor. The sampling frequency is 16K and can
only monitor 2CH
2: High-speed monitor. The sampling frequency is 8K and can
monitor 4CH.

1: Reserved
0: Disable the monitor function
Address: 0312H
P3-09 Reserved
0313H
Address: 0314H
P3-10 Reserved
0315H
Address: 0316H
P3-11 Reserved
0317H

P4-xx Diagnosis Parameters

Address: 0400H
P4-00 ASH1 Fault Record (N)
0401H
Interface: 4.4.1
Default: 0
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: N/A
Data Size: 32-bit
Format: Hexadecimal
Settings: The last abnormal status record
Low word: LXXXX: display ALM number
High word: hYYYY: Reserved
Address: 0402H
P4-01 ASH2 Fault Record (N-1)
0403H
Interface: 4.4.1
Default: 0
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: N/A
Data Size: 32-bit
Format: Hexadecimal
Settings: The last second abnormal status record
High word: hYYYY: display the error code corresponds to
CANopen
Address: 0404H
0405H
Interface: 4.4.1
Default: 0
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: N/A
Data Size: 32-bit
Format: Hexadecimal

CANopen
Address: 0406H
0407H
Interface: 4.4.1
Default: 0
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: N/A
Data Size: 32-bit
Format: Hexadecimal
CANopen
Address: 0408H
0409H
Interface: 4.4.1
Default: 0
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: N/A
Data Size: 32-bit
Format: Hexadecimal
CANopen
Address: 040AH
P4-05 JOG JOG Operation
040BH
Interface: 4.4.2
Default: 20
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: r/min
Range: 0 ~ 5000
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: Three control methods are as follows:

1. Operation Test
After the JOG speed is set by P4-05 via panel, the panel will
display the symbol of JOG. Pressing the UP Key can control
JOG operation in positive direction, pressing the DOWN Key
can control negative direction. Stop pressing to stop the JOG
operation. If there is any error in this setting, then the motor
cannot operate. The maximum JOG speed is the maximum
speed of the servo motor.
2. DI control
If the DI is set to JOGU and JOGD (refer to table 7.1), then the
JOG operation in positive or negative direction can be
controlled via this DI.
3. Communication Control
1 ~ 5000: JOG speed
4998: JOG operation in positive direction
4999: JOG operation in negative direction
0: Stop operation
NOTE When writing via communication, if the frequency is high, please

set P2-30 to 5.
P4-06 Digital Output Register (Readable and Address: 040CH

FOT
Writable) 040DH
Interface: 4.4.3
Default: 0
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: -
Range: 0 ~ 0x3F
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Hexadecimal
Settings: Contact control of the force output
0: Non-force output (When the communication sets to 0, it can
cancel the force output function.)
Address: 040CH
P4-07 ITST Input Status
040DH
Operation Software (cannot Related Section:
Interface: read and write Communication 4.4.4, 8.2
throught the panel)
Default: 0
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 01FF

Data Size: 16-bit

Format: Hexadecimal
Settings: The DI input signal can come from external terminal (DI1 ~ DI9) or
software SDI1 ~ 9 (Bit 0 ~ 8 of corresponding parameter P4-07)
and is determined by P3-06. The corresponding bit of P3-06 is 1,
which means the source is software SDI (P4-07). If the
corresponding bit is 0, then the source is hardware DI. See the
following graph:
External P3-06
DI1~9
DI after combination
Internal
SDI1~9
(P4-07)
Read parameters: shows the DI status after combination

Write parameters: writes the software SDI status
For example:
The value of reading P4-07 is 0x0011, which means DI1 and DI5
is ON after combination.
The value of writing P4-07 is 0x0011, which means software SDI1
and SDI5 is ON.
Please refer to P2-10 ~ P2-17 and P2-36 for the function program
of digital input pin DI (DI1~DI9).
Input Status of the Drive Keypad Address: 0410H

P4-08 PKEY
(Read-only) 0411H
Interface:
Default: N/A
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: Read only
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Hexadecimal
Settings: The aim is to check if the five Keys, MODE, UP, DOWN, SHIFT
and SET can work normally. This parameter is also used to check
if the Keys are all functional when producing servo drives.

Address: 0412H
P4-09 MOT Output Status (Read-only)
0413H
Interface: 4.4.5
Default: N/A
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 0x3F
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Hexadecimal
Settings: There is no difference when reading DO output signal via panel or
the communication.
Address: 0414H
P4-10 CEN Adjustment Function
0415H
Interface:
Default: 0
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 6
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: 0: Reserved
1: Execute the adjustment of analog speed input offset
2: Execute the adjustment of analog torque input offset
3: Execute the adjustment of current detector (V phase) hardware
offset
4: Execute the adjustment of current detector (W phase) hardware
offset
5: Execute the adjustment of 1 ~ 4 hardward offset
6: Execute the adjustment of IGBT ADC
NOTE The adjustment function needs to be enabled by the setting of

parameter P2-08. When adjusting, the external wiring which
connects to analog speed or torque needs to be removed
completely and must be in Servo Off status.

Address: 0416H
P4-11 SOF1 Analog Speed Input Offset Adjustment 1
0417H
Interface:
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 32767
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: Manually adjust the hardware offset. The adjustment function
needs to be enabled by the setting of parameter P2-08. It is not
suggested to adjust the auxiliary adjustment. This parameter
cannot be reset.
Address: 0418H
P4-12 SOF2 Analog Speed Input Offset Adjustment 2
0419H
Interface:
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 32767
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
cannot be reset.
Address: 041AH
P4-13 TOF1 Analog Torque Offset Adjustment 1
041BH
Interface:
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 32767
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
cannot be reset.

Address: 041CH
P4-14 TOF2 Analog Torque Drift Adjustment 2
041DH
Interface:
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 32767
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
cannot be reset.
Current Detector (V1 phase) Offset Address: 041EH

P4-15 COF1
Adjustment 041FH
Interface:
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 32767
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
cannot be reset.
Current Detector (V2 phase) Offset Address: 0420H

P4-16 COF2
Adjustment 0421H
Interface:
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 32767
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal

cannot be reset.
Current Detector (W1 phase) Offset Address: 0422H

P4-17 COF3
Adjustment 0423H
Interface:
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 32767
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
cannot be reset.
Current Detector (W2 phase) Offset Address: 0424H

P4-18 COF4
Adjustment 0425H
Interface:
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 32767
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
cannot be reset.
IGBT NTC Adjustment Detection Level Address: 0426H

P4-19 TIGB
(cannot reset) 0427H

Interface:
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: 1 ~ 3
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal

Settings: Please cool down the drive to 25 Celsius degree when adjusting
Offset Adjustment of Analog Monitor Address: 0428H

P4-20 DOF1
Output (MON1) 0429H
Interface: 6.4.4
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: mV
Range: -800 ~ 800
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Offset Adjustment of Analog Monitor Address: 042AH

P4-21 DOF2
Output (MON2) 042BH
Interface: 6.4.4
Default: 0
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: mV
Range: -800 ~ 800
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Address: 042CH
P4-22 SAO Analog Speed Input Offset
042DH
Interface:
Default: 0
Control
S
Mode:
Unit: mV
Range: -5000 ~ 5000
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: Users manually adjust the offset

Address: 042EH
P4-23 TAO Analog Torque Input Offset
042FH
Interface:
Default: 0
Control
T
Mode:
Unit: mV
Range: -5000 ~ 5000
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: Users manually adjust the offset
Address: 0430H
P4-24 LVL Level of Undervoltage Error
0431H
Interface:
Default: 160
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: V (rms)
Range: 140 ~ 190
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Decimal
Settings: When the voltage of DC BUS is lower than P4-24* 2 , the under
voltage alarm occurs.

Table 7.1 Function Description of Digital Input (DI)

Setting value: 0x01
Trigger Control
DI Name Function Description of Digital Input (DI)
Method Mode
When this DI is On, servo is activated (Servo On) Level

SON All
Triggered
Setting value: 0x02

Trigger Control
Method Mode
After the alarm has been cleared, when the DI is ON Rising-edge
ARST All
the drive will show that the alarm has been cleared. Triggered
Setting value: 0x03

Trigger Control
Method Mode
In speed and position mode, when the DI is ON
Level
GAINUP (P2-27 should be set to 1), the gain switched to the PT, S
Triggered
one multiplies the switching rate.
Setting value: 0x04

Trigger Contro
Method l Mode
Clear the pulse counter and the setting of parameter
P2-50. Rising-edge
Triggered,
CCLR 0: clear the position pulse deviation (It is suitable in PT
Level
PT mode). When DI is ON, the accumulative pulse
Triggered
deviation of the drive will be cleared to 0.

Setting value: 0x05

Trigger Contro
Method l Mode
When the speed is slower than the setting of zero
speed (P1-38), if the DI is ON, the motor stops running.
Speed
Command
Setting value of
P1-38 (Zero speed)
Level
ZCLAMP S
ZCLAMP Triggered
input signal
OFF ON
Motor Speed
Setting value of
P1-38 (Zero speed)
Time
Setting value: 0x06

Trigger Control
Method Mode
In PT and speed mode, when the DI is ON, the input Level
CMDINV S, T
command will be in reverse direction. Triggered
Setting value: 0x07

Trigger Control
Method Mode
Reserved
Setting value: 0x09

Trigger Control
Method Mode
In speed and position mode, when the DI is ON, the
motor torque will be limited, and the limited torque Level
TRQLM PT, S
command will be internal register or analog voltage Triggered
command.
Setting value: 0x10

Trigger Control
Method Mode
In torque mode, when the DI is ON, the motor speed
Level
SPDLM will be limited, the limited speed command will be T
Triggered
internal register or analog voltage command.

Setting value: 0x14 ~ 0x15

DI Trigger Control
Function Description of Digital Input (DI)
Name Method Mode
Internal speed command selection (1 ~ 4)

DI signal of
Command Command
CN1 Content Range
No. Source
SPD1 SPD0
Voltage
External
between
S analog +/-10 V
V-REF
Mode
SPD0 command Level
S1 OFF OFF and GND S
SPD1 Speed Triggered
Sz None command 0
is 0
S2 OFF ON P1-09 -60000
S3 ON OFF Register P1-10 ~
parameter +60000
S4 ON ON P1-11 r/min
Setting value: 0x16 ~ 0x17

DI Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
Internal torque command selection (1 ~ 4)
DI signal of
Command Command
CN1 Content Range
No. Source
TCM1 TCM0
Voltage
Analog between +/-10
T
TCM0 command V-REF V Level
Mode
T1 OFF OFF and GND T

TCM1 Triggered
Torque
Tz None command 0
is 0
T2 OFF ON P1-12 -300 ~
Register
T3 ON OFF P1-13 +300
parameter
T4 ON ON P1-14 %
Setting value: 0x18

Trigger Control
Method Mode
In position and speed mode, if the DI is OFF, it is in
Level Dual
S-P speed mode. And it is in position mode when the DI is
Triggered mode
ON.

Setting value: 0x19

Trigger Control
Method Mode
In speed and torque mode, if the DI is OFF, it is in
Level Dual
S-T speed mode. And it is in torque mode when the DI is
Triggered mode
ON.
Setting value: 0x20

Trigger Control
Method Mode
In position and torque mode, if the DI is OFF, it is in
Level Dual
T-P torque mode; if the DI is ON, then it is in position
Triggered mode
mode.
Setting value: 0x21

Trigger Control
Method Mode
When this DI is ON, the motor stops urgently. Level
EMGS All
Triggered
Setting value: 0x22

Trigger Control
Method Mode
Reverse inhibit limit (contact b) Level
NL(CWL) All
Triggered
Setting value: 0x23

Trigger Control
Method Mode
Forward inhibit limit (contact b) Level
PL(CCWL) All
Triggered
Setting value: 0x25

Trigger Control
Method Mode
Torque limit - Reverse operation Level

TLLM PT, S
Triggered

Setting value: 0x26

Trigger Control
Method Mode
Torque limit - Forward operation Level

TRLM PT, S
Triggered
Setting value: 0x37

Trigger Control
Method Mode
When this DI is ON, the motor will JOG in forward Level
JOGU All
direction. Triggered
Setting value: 0x38

Trigger Control
Method Mode
When this DI is on, the motor will JOG in reverse Level
JOGD All
direction. Triggered
Setting value: 0x43, 0x44

DI Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
Gear Ratio Selection 0 (Numerator)
Gear Ratio Selection 1 (Numerator)
GNUM0 Level
PT
GNUM1 Triggered
Setting value: 0x45

Trigger Control
Method Mode
In position mode, when this DI is ON, the external Level
INHP PT
pulse input command is not working. Triggered

Setting value: 0x48

Trigger Control
Method Mode
Torque command source. Please refer to the settings Level
TQP T
of P2-66 Bit0. Triggered
Setting value: 0x49

Trigger Control
Method Mode
Torque command source. Please refer to the settings Level
TQN T
of P2-66 Bit0. Triggered
NOTE
1) 11 ~ 17: Single control mode, 18 ~ 20: Dual control mode

2) When P2-10 to P2-17 and P2-36 is set to 0, DI has no function.

Table 7.2 Fucntion Description of Digital Output (DO)

Setting value: 0x01
DO Trigger Control
Function Description of Digital Output (DO)
Name Method Mode
When the controlled and main circuit power is applied Level

SRDY All
to the drive, this DO is ON if no alarm occurs. Triggered
Setting value: 0x02

DO Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
When the servo is ON, this DO is ON if no alarm Level

SON All
occurs. Triggered
Setting value: 0x03

DO Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
When the motor speed is slower than the setting Level

ZSPD All
speed of zero speed (P1-38), this DO is ON. Triggered
Setting value: 0x04

DO Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
When the motor speed is faster than the target speed Level
TSPD All
(P1-39), this DO is ON. Triggered
Setting value: 0x05

DO Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
In position mode, when the deviation pulse number is
Level
TPOS smaller than the position range (the setting value of PT
Triggered
P1-54), this DO is ON.
Setting value: 0x06

DO Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
All,
Level
TQL When it is in torque limit, this DO is ON. except
Triggered
T, Tz

Setting value: 0x07

DO Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
When the alarm occurs, this DO is ON.
Level
ALRM (Except forward / reverse limit, communication error, All
Triggered
undervoltage)
Setting value: 0x08

DO Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
When the signal of brake control is output, adjust the
setting of parameter P1-42 and P1-43.
Level
BRKR All
Triggered
Setting value: 0x10

DO Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
When reaching the overload setting, this DO is ON.
tOL= Overload allowable time of the servo x Setting
value of P1-56, when the overload accumulative
time exceeds tOL, it will output pre-overload warning
(OLW). However, if the overload accumulative time
exceeds the overload allowable time of the servo, it
will output pre-overload error (ALRM).
For example:
The setting value of pre-overload warning is 60%
Level
OLW (P1-56=60). All
Triggered
When the output average load of the servo drive is
200%, if the output time exceeds 8 seconds, the servo
drive will show the overload alarm (AL.006).
tOL= The output average load of the servo exceeds
200% for 8 seconds x parameter setting value =
8sec x 60% = 4.8sec
Result: When the output average load of the servo
drive exceeds 200% for 4.8 seconds, this DO is ON. If it
exceeds for 8 seconds, then, DO.ALRM is ON.

Setting value: 0x11

DO Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
Warning output (Forward / reverse limit, communication Level
WARN All
error, undervoltage) Triggered
Setting value: 0x13

DO Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
SNL Level
Software limit (Reverse limit) All
(SCWL) Triggered
Setting value: 0x14

DO Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
SPL Level
Software limit (Forward limit) All
(SCCWL) Triggered
Setting value: 0x19

DO Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
Speed completed output: In speed mode, when the
deviation between the speed feedback and the Level
SP_OK S, Sz
command is smaller than the setting value of P1-47, Triggered
then this DO is ON.
NOTE
1) When P2-18 to P2-22 and P2-37 is set to 0, DI has no function.

Chapter 8 Communications
8.1 RS-485 & RS-232 Communication Hardware Interface

This servo drive supports the serial communication of RS-485 and RS-232.
Communication function enables the servo drive to access and change parameters inside
the system. However, RS-485 and RS-232 cannot be used at the same time. Parameter
P3-05 can use RS-485 and RS-232 as the communication protocol. Followings are the
wiring description.
RS-232
Configuration
NOTE
1) 15-meter communication cable is suitable for less interference environment. If the

transmission speed is over 38400bps, the length of communication cable should be
shorter than 3 meters so as to ensure the accuracy of transmission.
2) Numbers shown in the above diagram represent the pin number of each connector.

Chapter 8 Communications ASDA-B2
RS-485
Configuration
NOTE
1) 100 meters of communication cable is suitable for less interference environment. If the
transmission speed is over 38400bps, the length of communication cable should not
longer than 15 meters so as to ensure the accuracy of transmission.
2) Numbers shown in the above diagram represent the pin number of each connector.
3) Please use the power supply unit whose direct current is over 12 volt.
4) Using RS-485 can connect up to 32 servo drives at the same time. REPEATER can be
used to connect more servo drives. 254 is the maximum.
5) Please refer to Chapter 3.5 for CN3 Pin Definition.

ASDA-B2 Chapter 8 Communications
8.2 RS-485 / RS-232 Communication Parameter Settings

The following four parameters, P3-00 (Address Setting), P3-01 (Transmission Speed), P3-
02 (Communication Protocol) and P3-05 (Communication Mechanism), are essential and
must be set for the communication of the servo drive. The rest, such as P3-03
(Communication Error Disposal), P3-04 (Communication Timeout), P3-06 (Control Switch
of Digital Input), P3-07 (Communication Response Delay Time) and P3-08 (Monitor Mode)
is optional. Please refer to Chapter 7 of this user manual.
Address: 0300H
P3-00 ADR Address Setting
0301H
Interface: Section 8.2
Default: 0x7F
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: 0x01 ~ 0x7F
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Hexadecimal
Settings: The communication address setting is divided into Y, X
(hexadecimal):
Display 0 0 Y X
Range - - 0~7 0~F
When using RS-232/RS-485 to communicate, one servo drive
can only set one address. The duplicate address setting will
cause abnormal communication.
This address represents the absolute address of the servo drive
in communication network. It is also applicable to RS-232/485
and CAN bus.
When the communication address setting of MODBUS is set to
0xFF, the servo drive will automatically reply and receive data
regardless of the address. However, P3-00 cannot be set to
0xFF.

Address: 0302H
P3-01 BRT Transmission Speed
0303H
Default: 0x0033
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: bps
Range: 0x0000 ~ 0x0055
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Hexadecimal
(hexadecimal):
0 Z Y X
Range 0 0 0~5 0~5
Settings:
0: 4800
1: 9600
2: 19200
3: 38400
4: 57600
5: 115200
Address: 0304H
P3-02 PTL Communication Protocol
0305H
Default: 0x0066
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: 0x0000 ~ 0x0088
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Hexadecimal


(hexadecimal):
0 Z Y X
Range 0 0 0~8 0~8
2: 7, O,1 (MODBUS, ASCII)
5: 8, O, 1 (MODBUS, ASCII)
6: 8, N, 2 (MODBUS, RTU)
7: 8, E, 1 (MODBUS, RTU)
8: 8, O, 1 (MODBUS, RTU)
Address: 030AH
P3-05 CMM Communication Mechanism
030BH
Default: 1
Control
ALL
Mode:
Unit: N/A
Range: 0x00 ~ 0x01
Data Size: 16-bit
Format: Hexadecimal
Settings: RS-232 Communication interface selection
0: RS-232 via Modbus communication
1: RS-232 upon ASDA-Soft software

8.3 MODBUS Communication Protocol

There are two modes of MODBUS networks communication, ASCII (American Standard
Code for information interchange) mode and RTU (Remote Terminal Unit) mode. Users
could set the needed communication protocol via parameter P3-02. Apart from these two
communication modes, this servo drive also supports function of 03H to access more than
one data, 06H to write one character and 10H to write multiple characters. Please refer to
the following descriptions.
Code Description:
ASCII Mode:
The so-called ASCII mode is using American Standard Code for Information Interchange
(ASCII) to transmit the data. Between two stations (Master and Slave) to transmit data 64H,
the master will send6which represented by 36H of ASCII code and 4 represented
by 34H of ASCII code.
The following table shows the available hexadecimal characters and their corresponding
ASCII code of digit 0 to 9 and characters A to F is as follows:
Character 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
ASCII code 30H 31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 36H 37H
Character 8 9 A B C D E F
ASCII code 38H 39H 41H 42H 43H 44H 45H 46H
RTU Mode:
Every 8-bit of data is constituted by two 4-bits hexadecimal characters. If data 64H is
transmitted between two stations, it will be transmitted directly, which is more efficient than
ASCII mode.

Character Structure
Characters will be encoded into the following framing and transmitted in serial. The
checking method of different bit is as the following.
10-bit character frame (For 7-bits character)

7N2
Start Stop Stop
bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
bit bit
7-data bits
10-bits character frame
7E1
Start Even Stop
bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 parity bit
7-data bits
7O1
Start Odd Stop
bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 parity bit
7-data bits
11-bit character frame (For 8-bits character)

8N2
Start Stop Stop
bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
bit bit
8-data bits
8E1
Start Even Stop
bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
parity bit
8-data bits
8O1
Start Odd Stop
bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
parity bit
8-data bits

Communication Data Structure:
ASCII Mode:
Start Start character: (3AH)
Slave address Communication address: 1-byte consists of 2 ASCII codes
Function Function code: 1-byte consists of 2 ASCII codes
DATA(n-1)
. Data content: n word = n x 2-byte consists of n x 4 ASCII codes, n10
DATA(0)
LRC Error checking: 1-byte consists of 2 ASCII codes
End 1 End code 1: (0DH)(CR)
End 0 End code 0: (0AH)(LF)
The start character of communication in ASCII mode is colon (ASCII is 3AH), ADR is
the ASCII code of two characters. The end code is CR (Carriage Return) and LF (Line
Feed). And the communication address, function code, data content, error checking LRC
(Longitudinal Redundancy Check), etc are between the start character and end code.
RTU Mode:
Start A silent interval of more than 10ms
Slave address Communication address: 1-byte
Function Function code: 1-byte
DATA(n-1)
. Data content: n word = n x 2-byte, n10
DATA(0)
CRC Error checking: 1-byte
End 1 A silent interval of more than 10ms
The start of communication in RTU (Remote Terminal Unit) mode is a silent interval. The
end of it is another silent interval. The communication address, function code, data content,
error checking CRC (Cyclical Redundancy Check), etc are between the start and the end.

Example 1: function code 03H, access multiple words:

The Master issues the command to the 1st Slave and reads the continuous 2 words
starting from the start address 0200H. In response message from the Slave, the content of
starting address 0200H is 00B1H and the content of the 2nd data address 0201H is 1F40H.
The maximum allowable data in one single access is 10. The calculation of LRC and CRC
will be described in next chapter.
ASCII Mode:
Command message (Master): Response message (Slave):
Start : Start :
0 0
Slave address Slave address
1 1
0 0
Function Function
3 3
0 Number of data 0
Starting data 2 (In Byte) 4'
address 0 0
0 Contents of 0
starting data
0 address 0200H B
0 1
Number of data
0 1
2 Contents of F
second data
F address 0201H 4
LRC Check
8 0
End 1 (0DH)(CR) E
LRC Check
End 0 (0AH)(LF) 8
End 1 (0DH)(CR)
End 0 (0AH)(LF)
RTU Mode:
Slave address 01H Slave address 01H
Function 03H Function 03H
Starting data 02H (High) Number of data
04H
address 00H (Low) (In Byte)
00H Contents of 00H (High)
Number of data
starting data
(In Word) 02H B1H (Low)
address 0200H
CRC Check Low C5H (Low) Contents of 1FH (High)
CRC Check second data
B3H (High) address 0201H 40H (Low)
High
CRC Check Low A3H (Lower bytes)
CRC Check
D4H (Upper bytes)
High

Please note that before and after the transmission in RTU mode, 10ms of silent interval is
needed.
Example 2: function code 06H, write single word:
The Master issues command to the 1st Slave and writes data 0064H to address 0200H.
The Slave sends the response message to the Master after the writing is completed. The
calculation of LRC and CRC will be described in next chapter.
ASCII Mode:
Start : Start :
0 0
Slave address Slave address
1 1
0 0
Function Function
6 6
0 0
Starting data 2 Starting data 2'
address 0 address 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
Content of data Content of data
6 6
4 4
9 9
LRC Check LRC Check
3 3
End 1 (0DH)(CR) End 1 (0DH)(CR)
End 0 (0AH)(LF) End 0 (0AH)(LF)
RTU Mode:
Slave Address 01H Slave Address 01H
Starting data 02H (High) Starting data 02H (High)
address 00H (Low) address 00H (Low)
00H (High) 00H (High)
Content of data Content of data
64H (Low) 64H (Low)
CRC Check Low 89H (Low) CRC Check Low 89H (Low)
CRC Check CRC Check
99H (High) 99H (High)
High High
needed.

Example 3: function code 10H, write multiple words:

The Master issues command to the 1st Slave and writes 0BB8H and 0000H to the starting
address 0112H. That is to say, 0112H is written into 0BB8H and 0113H is written into
0000H. The maximum allowable data in one single access is 10. The Slave sends the
response message to the Master after the writing is completed. The calculation of LRC
and CRC will be described in next chapter.
ASCII Mode:
Start : Start :
0 0
Slave Address Slave Address
1 1
1 1
Function Function
0 0
0 0
Starting data 1 Starting data 1'
address 1 address 1
2 2
0 0
Number of data 0 0
Content of data
(In Word) 0 0
2 2
Number of data 0 D
LRC Check
(In Byte) 4 A
0 End 1 (0DH)(CR)
Content of 1st B End 0 (0AH)(LF)
data B
8
0
Content of 2nd 0
data 0
0
1
LRC Check
3
End 1 (0DH)(CR)
End 0 (0AH)(LF)

RTU Mode:
Slave Address 01H Slave Address 01H
Starting data 01H (High) Starting data 01H (High)
address 12H (Low) address 12H (Low)
Number of data 00H (High) Content of data 00H (High)
(In Word) 02H (Low) (In Word) 02H (Low)
CRC Check Low E0H (Low)
Number of data
04H CRC Check
(In Byte) 31H (High)
High
Content of 1st 0BH (High)
data B8H (Low)
Content of 2nd 00H (High)
data 00H (Low)
CRC Check Low FCH (Low)
CRC Check
EBH (High)
High
needed.
LRC and CRC transmission Error Checking:

The error checking in ASCII communication mode is LRC (Longitudinal Redundancy
Check); CRC (Cyclical Redundancy Check) is for RTU communication mode. The
algorithm of both is as the following.
LRC (ASCII mode):
STX :
7
ADR
F
0
CMD
3
0
5
Starting data address
C
4
0
0
Number of data
0
1
LRC Check B

4
End 1 (0DH)(CR)
End 0 (0AH)(LF)
The LRC algorithm is: add all byte, round down the carry and take 2s complement. For
example, 7FH + 03H + 05H + C4H + 00H + 01H = 14CH, round down carry 1 and take
4CH.
2s complement of 4CH is B4H.
CRC (RTU Mode):
The description of CRC is as the followings:
Step 1: Load a 16-bits register of FFFFH, which is called CRC register.
Step 2: (The low byte of CRC register) XOR (The first byte of command), and save
the result in CRC register.
Step 3: Right move one bit. Check the least significant bit (LSB) of CRC register. If
the bit is 1, then (CRC register) XOR (A001H).
Step 4: Return to Step 3 until Step 3 has been executed for 8 times. Go to Step 5.
Step 5: Repeat the procedure from Step 2 to Step 4 until all byte is processing. Get
the result of CRC value.
Description: After calculating CRC value, fill in the low word of CRC first in command
message, and then fill in the high word of CRC. For example, if the result of CRC algorithm
is 3794H, fill in 94H in low word and then 37H in high word.
Command Message
ADR 01H
CMD 03H
Starting data 01H (High)
address
01H (Low)
Number of data 00H (High)
(In Word)
02H (Low)
CRC Check Low 94H (Low)
CRC Check High 37H (High)

Example of CRC program:

Produce CRC in C language. This function needs two parameters:
unsigned char* data;
unsigned char length
The function returns the CRC value as a type of unsigned integer.
unsigned int crc_chk(unsigned char* data, unsigned char length) {
int j;
unsigned int reg_crc=0xFFFF;
while( length-- ) {
reg_crc^= *data++;
for (j=0; j<8; j++ ) {
if( reg_crc & 0x01 ) { /*LSB(bit 0 ) = 1 */
reg_crc = (reg_crc >> 1)^0xA001;
} else {
reg_crc = (reg_crc>>1);
}
}
}
return reg_crc;
}
PC communication program example:
#include<stdio.h>
#include<dos.h>
#include<conio.h>
#include<process.h>
#define PORT 0x03F8 /* the address of COM 1 */
#define THR 0x0000
#define RDR 0x0000
#define BRDL 0x0000
#define IER 0x0001
#define BRDH 0x0001
#define LCR 0x0003
#define MCR 0x0004
#define LSR 0x0005
#define MSR 0x0006
unsigned char rdat[60];
/* read 2 data from address 0200H of ASD with address 1 */
unsigned char tdat[60]={:,0,1,0,3,0,2,0,0,0,0,0,2,F,8,\r,\n};

void main() {
int I;
outportb(PORT+MCR,0x08); /* interrupt enable */
outportb(PORT+IER,0x01); /* interrupt as data in */
outportb(PORT+LCR,( inportb(PORT+LCR) | 0x80 ) );
/* the BRDL/BRDH can be access as LCR.b7 == 1 */
outportb(PORT+BRDL,12);
outportb(PORT+BRDH,0x00);
outportb(PORT+LCR,0x06); /* set prorocol
<7,E,1> = 1AH, <7,O,1> = 0AH
<8,N,2> = 07H <8,E,1> = 1BH
<8,O,1> = 0BH
*/
for( I = 0; I<=16; I++ ) {

while( !(inportb(PORT+LSR) & 0x20) ); /* wait until THR empty */
outportb(PORT+THR,tdat[I]); /* send data to THR */
}
I = 0;
while( !kbhit() ) {
if( inportb(PORT+LSR)&0x01 ) { /* b0==1, read data ready */
rdat[I++] = inportb(PORT+RDR); /* read data from RDR */
}
}
}

8.4 Write-in and Read-out Communication Parameters

Please refer to Chapter 7, Parameters for all parameter details. And the descriptions of
parameters which can be wrote or read through communication are as follows.
Parameters are divided into 5 groups, Group 0: Monitor Parameters, Group 1: Basic
Parameters, Group 2: Extension Parameters, Group 3: Communication Parameters and
Group 4: Diagnosis Parameters.
Write parameters via communication:

Parameters which can be written through communication include:
Group 0, except (P0-00~P0-01), (P0-08~P0-13) and (P0-46) Group 1 (P1-00~P1-76)
Group 2 (P2-00~P2-67)
Group 3 (P3-00~P3-11)
Group 4, except (P4-00~P4-04) and (P4-08~P4-09)
Please note that:

(P3-01) When change to a new communication speed, the next data will be written in a
new transmission speed after setting the new value.
(P3-02) When change to the new communication protocol, the next data will be written
with the new communication protocol after setting the new value.
(P4-05) JOG controls parameters of the servo. Please refer to Chapter 8, Parameters for
the description.
(P4-06) Force to control output contact. This parameter is for DO (Digital Output) testing.
Users can write 1, 2, 4, 8 and 16 to test DO1, DO2, DO3, DO4 and DO5
respectively. Please write 0 after the test so as to inform the servo drive that the
test has been completed.
(P4-10) Adjustment function selection. Write 20 (= 14H in hexadecimal format) in
parameter P2-08 first to enable the adjustment so as to change the value of P4-
10.
(P4-11 ~ P4-21) This parameter is Offset Adjustment. Do not change the setting unless it
is necessary. If it is necessary, please write 22 (= 16H, in hexadecimal
format) in parameter P2-08 first to enable the function so as to change
the value of (P4-11 ~ P4-21)
Read parameters through communication:

Parameters can be read through communication include:
Group 0 (P0-00~P0-46) Group 3 (P3-00~P3-11)
Group 1 (P1-00~P1-76) Group 4 (P4-00~P4-23)
Group 2 (P2-00~P2-67)

Chapter 9 Troubleshooting
9.1 Alarm of Servo Drive

Corresponding Servo
Display Alarm Name Alarm Description
DO Status
Over current The current of the main circuit is 1.5
Servo
AL001 times more than the instantaneous ALM
Off
current of the motor.
Servo
AL002 Over voltage The voltage of the main circuit is
higher than the standard voltage.
ALM
Off
Servo
AL003 Under voltage The voltage of the main circuit is
lower than the standard voltage.
WARN
Off
Motor The drive corresponds to the wrong
Servo
AL004 Combination motor. ALM
Off
Error
Servo
AL005 Regeneration
Error
Regeneration control is in error.
ALM
Off
Servo
AL006 Overload The motor and the drive is overload.
ALM
Off
Servo
AL007 Over speed The control speed of the motor
exceeds the normal speed.
ALM
Off
Abnormal The input frequency of the pulse
Servo
AL008 Pulse command is over the allowable value ALM
Off
Command of the hardware interface.
Excessive The deviation of position command
Deviation of exceeds the allowable setting value. Servo
AL009 Position
ALM
Off
Command
Servo
AL011 Encoder Error pulse.
The encoder produces abnormal
ALM
Off
Adjustment When executing electrical adjustment,
Servo
AL012 Error the adjusted value exceeds the ALM
Off
allowable value.
Servo
AL013 Emergency
Stop
Press the emergency stop button.
WARN
Off
AL014 Reverse
Error
Limit Activate the reverse limit switch.
WARN
Servo
On
AL015 Forward
Error
Limit Activate the forward limit switch.
WARN
Servo
On

Chapter 9 Troubleshooting ASDA-B2
Corresponding Servo
DO Status
Servo
AL016 IGBT Overheat The temperature of IGBT is over high ALM
Off
Servo
AL017 Abnormal
EEPROM
It is in error when DSP accesses
EEPROM.
ALM
Off
Servo
AL018 Abnormal
signal output
The encoder output exceeds the
rated output frequency.
ALM
Off
Serial RS-232/485 communication is in error
Servo
AL019 Communication ALM
Off
Error
Serial RS-232/485 communication time out
Servo
AL020 Communication WARN
On
Time Out
Main Circuit Only one single phase is inputted in
Servo
AL022 Power Lack the main circuit power. WARN
Off
Phase
Servo
AL023 Early Warning Early Warning for Overload
for Overload
WARN
On
Encoder initial The magnetic field of the encoder U,
Servo
AL024 magnetic field V, W signal is in error. ALM
Off
error
The Internal of The internal memory of the encoder
Servo
AL025 the Encoder is and the internal counter are in error. ALM
Off
in Error
Unreliable The error of the internal data has
Servo
AL026 internal data of been detected for three times ALM
Off
the encoder continuously.
The Internal of The internal reset of the encoder is in Servo
AL027 the Encoder is error ALM
Off
in Error
The Internal of The encoder, U, V, W signals are in Servo
Off
in Error
The Internal of Internal address of the encoder is in Servo
Off
in Error
Motor Crash The motor crashes the equipment,
Servo
AL030 Error reaches the torque of P1-57 and ALM
Off
exceeds the time set by P1-58.
Incorrect wiring Incorrect wiring of the motor power
of the motor line U, V, W, GND or the connection Servo
AL031 power line U, between both is breakdown.
ALM
Off
V, W, GND

ASDA-B2 Chapter 9 Troubleshooting
Corresponding Servo
DO Status
Encoder Encoder temperature exceeds the
temperature protective range Servo
AL035 exceeds the ALM
Off
protective
range
Excessive The encoder output errors or the
Servo
AL048 encoder output output pulse exceeds hardware ALM
Off
error tolerance.
Encoder Encoder temperature exceeds the
Servo
AL067 temperature warning level. (But it is still within the ALM
Off
warning protective range.)
Servo drive When the output current from servo
outputs drive exceeds the setting level,
excessive ALE083 will be triggered to protect Servo
AL083 current IGBT. This could avoid IGBT to be
ALM
Off
burned out because of the excessive
current.
Servo
AL085 Regeneration
error
Regeneration control is in error.
ALM
Off
DSP Firmware EEPROM has not been reset after
Upgrade upgrading the firmware. The fault can
Servo
AL099 be cleared when firstly set P2-08 to WARN
On
30. Then set P2-08 to 28. And re-
power on the drive.
Do not
AL555 System Failure DSP processing error N/A
Switch
Do not
AL880 System Failure DSP processing error N/A
Switch

9.2 Causes and Corrective Actions

Alarm Display
AL001 Over current

Causes Checking Method Corrective Actions
The drive output is Check if the wiring between the motor Eliminate short-circuit and
short-circuit and the drive is correct and see if the avoid metal conductor being
wire is short-circuited. exposed.
The motor wiring is Check if the wiring steps are correct Rewiring by following the
in error. when connecting the motor to the drive. wiring description from the
user manual.
IGBT is abnormal The temperature of the heat sink is Send the drive back to the
abnormal distributors or contact with
Delta
The control Check if the setting value exceeds the Setting back to the default
parameter setting is default setting setting and then gradually
in error. adjust the value.
Unreasonable Check if the command doing Less steep command used or
command reasonable acceleration time. filter applying to smooth
command.
AL002Over voltage
The input voltage of Use the voltmeter to see if the input Apply to the correct power
the main circuit is voltage of the main circuit is within the supply or serial voltage
higher than the rated allowable voltage value. (please regulator.
rated allowable refer to Chapter 10.1)
voltage.
Wrong power input Use the voltmeter to see if the power Apply to the correct power
(incorrect power system matches the specification. supply or serial adaptor.
system)
The hardware of Use the voltmeter to see if the input Send the drive back to the
the servo drive is voltage of the main circuit is within the distributors or contact with
damaged. rated allowable voltage value but still Delta.
shows the error.
AL003Under voltage
The input voltage of Check if the input voltage wiring of the Re-confirm the voltage wiring.
the main circuit is main circuit is normal.
lower than the rated
allowable voltage.
No power supply Use the voltmeter to see if the voltage Check the power switch
for the main circuit. of the main circuit is normal.
Wrong power input Use the voltmeter to see if the power Apply to the correct power

(incorrect power system matches the specification. supply or serial adaptor.

system)
AL004Motor combination error

The encoder is The encoder is abnormal. Change the motor
damaged.
The encoder is Check the encoder connector. Install the motor again.
loose.
Motor Combination Connect to the right motor. Change the motor
Error
AL005Regeneration error
Choose wrong Check the connection of regenerative Calculate the value of the
regenerative resistor. regenerative resistor again
resistor or does not and correctly set the value of
connect to external P1-52 and P1-53. If issue
regenerative persists, please send the
resistor drive back to the distributors
or contact with Delta.
Parameter P1-53 is Check if parameter P1-53 of Set parameter P1-53 of
not set to zero regenerative resister is set to zero. regenerative resistor to zero
when the when it is not applying.
regenerative
resistor is not in
use.
Wrong parameter Check the setting value of parameter Correctly reset the value of
setting P1-52 and P1-53. P1-52 and P1-53.
AL006Overload
Over the rated Set parameter P0-02 to 11 and see if Increase the motor capacity
loading of the drive the average torque [%] is over 100% all or reduce the load.
and continuously the time.
excessive using
The setting of the 1. Check if there is any mechanical 1. Adjust the gain value of the
control system vibration. control circuit.
parameter is 2. Check if the acceleration / 2. Slow down the
inappropriate. deceleration constant are set too fast. acceleration / deceleration
setting time.
Wrong wiring of the Check the wiring of U, V, W and the Correct wiring
motor and the encoder.
encoder.
The encoder of the Send the drive back to the distributors or contact with Delta.
motor is defective.

AL007Overspeed
Unreasonable Use the scope to check if the signal of Less steep command used
command analog voltage is abnormal. or filter applying to smooth
command.
Inappropriate Check if the setting of parameter P2-34 Correctly set parameter P2-
parameter setting is too small (the condition of over-speed 34 (the condition of over-
warning). speed warning).
AL008Abnormal pulse command

The pulse Use the scope to check if the input Correctly set the input pulse
command frequency is over the rated input frequency.
frequency is higher frequency.
than the rated input
frequency.
AL009Excessive deviation of Position Command

Parameter P2-35 is Check the setting value of parameter Increase the setting value of
set too small P2-35 (The warning condition of P2-35 (The warning condition
excessive position deviation) of excessive position
deviation)
The setting of the Check if the setting value is Correctly adjust the gain
gain value is too appropriate value
small.
The torque limit is Check the torque limit value Correctly adjust the torque
too low. limit value
Excessive external Check the external load Reduce the external load or
load evaluate the motor capacity
again
AL011Encoder error
Wrong wiring of the Check if the wiring follows the Correct wiring
encoder suggested wiring of the user manual.
The encoder is loose Check the drive connector of CN2 Install the encoder again
and encoder
Bad connection of the Check if the connection between Reconnect the wiring
encoder CN2 of the drive and the encoder of
the servo motor is loose
The encoder is Check if the motor is damaged Change the motor
damaged

AL012Adjustment error
The analog input Measure if the voltage of the analog Correctly ground the analog
contact is incorrectly input contact is the same as the input contact
set back to zero ground voltage
The detection device Reset the power supply If issue persists, send the
is damaged drive back to the distributors
AL013Emergency stop
Press the emergency Check if the emergency stop button Activate emergency stop
stop button is enabled.
AL014Reverse limit error

Reverse limit switch is Check if the limit switch is enabled. Enable the reverse limit
activated. switch
The servo system is Check the control parameter and Re-adjust the parameter or
unstable. inertia ratio evaluate the motor capacity.
AL015Forward limit error

Forward limit switch is Check if the limit switch is enabled. Enable the forward limit
activated. switch
The servo system is Check the control parameter and Re-adjust the parameter or
unstable. inertia ratio evaluate the motor capacity.
AL016IGBT Overheat
Over the rated Check if it is overloading or the motor Increase the motor capacity
loading of the drive current is too high. or reduce the load.
and continuously
excessive using
The drive output is Check the drive output wiring Correct wiring
short-circuit
AL017Abnormal EEPROM
It is in error when Press the SHIFT Key on the panel The fault occurs when
DSP accesses and it shows EXGAB. applying to the power. It
EEPROM. X = 1, 2, 3 means one of the parameters
G = group code of the parameter is over the reasonable range.
AB = hexadecimal of the parameter Please re-power on after

If it shows E320A, it means it is adjusting.

parameter P2-10; If it shows E3610,
it means it is parameter P6-16. The fault occurs in normal
Please check the parameter. operation. It means it is in
error when writing the
parameter. The alarm can be
cleared by DI.ARST.
Abnormal hidden Press the SHIFT Key on the panel The fault occurs in parameter
parameter and it shows E100X reset. The setting of the drive
is wrong. Please set the
correct type of the drive.
Data in ROM is Press the SHIFT Key on the panel The fault occurs when it is
damaged. and it shows E0001 servo-on. Usually it is
because the data in ROM is
damaged or there is no data
in ROM. Please send the
drive back to the distributors
AL018Abnormal signal output

The encoder is in Check the fault records (P4-00~P4- Conduct the corrective
error and cause the 05). See if the alarm exists with the actions of AL.011, AL.024,
abnormal signal encoder error (AL011, AL024, AL.025, AL.026
output AL025, AL026)
The output pulse Check if the following conditions Correctly set parameter P1-
exceeds the hardware produce: 76 and P1-46:
allowable range. P1-76 < Motor Speed or P1-76 > Motor Speed or
Motor Speed Motor Speed
P1 46 4 19.8 10 6 P1 46 4 19.8 106
60 60
AL019Serial communication error

Improper setting of Check the setting value of Correctly set the parameter
the communication communication parameter value
parameter
Incorrect Check the communication address Correctly set the
communication communication address
address
Incorrect Check the accessing value Correctly set the value
communication value
AL020Serial communication time out

Improper setting of Check the parameter setting Correctly set the value
the time-out
parameter

The drive hasnt Check if the communication cable is Correct wiring

loose or broken.
received the
communication
command for a long
time.
AL022Main circuit power lack phase

The main circuit Check if RST power cable is loose or Make sure it applies to the
power is abnormal does not connect to the power. This power. If issue persists,
alarm occurs when no power please send the drive back to
connects to single phase servo drive the distributors or contact
with Delta.
AL023Early warning for overload

Early warning for 1. Check if it is used in overload 1. Please refer to the
overload condition. corrective actions of
2. Check if the value of parameter AL006.
P1-56 is set to small. 2. Please increase the
setting value of parameter
P1-56. Or set the value
over 100 and deactivate
the overload warning
function.
AL024Encoder initial magnetic field error

The initial magnetic 1. Check if the servo motor is If issue persists, please send
field of the encoder is properly grounded. the drive back to the
in error 2. Check if the encoder cable distributors or contact with
(Signal, U, V, W of separates from the power supply Delta.
the encoder magnetic or the high-current circuit to avoid
field is in error.) the interference.
3. Check if the shielding cables are
used in the wiring of the encoder.
AL025The internal of the encoder is in error

The internal of the 1. Check if the servo is properly 1. Please connect the UVW
encoder is in error. grounded. connector (color green) to
(The internal memory 2. Check if the encoder cable the heat sink of the servo
and the internal separates from the power supply drive.
counter are in error) or the high-current circuit to avoid 2. Please check if the
the interference. encoder cable separates
3. Check if the shielding cables are from the power supply or

used in the wiring of the encoder. the high-current circuit.

3. Please use shielding
mesh.
4. If issue persists, please
send the drive back to the
distributors or contact with
Delta.
AL026Unreliable internal data of the encoder

The encoder is in 1. Check if the servo is properly 1. Please connect the UVW
error. grounded. connector (color green) to
(Errors occur in the 2. Check if the encoder cable the heat sink of the servo
internal data for three separates from the power supply drive.
times continuously) or the high-current circuit to avoid 2. Please check if the
mesh.
Delta.

The internal reset of 1. Check if the servo is properly 1. Please connect the UVW
the encoder is in grounded. connector (color green) to
error. 2. Check if the encoder cable the heat sink of the servo
separates from the power supply drive.
or the high-current circuit to avoid 2. Please check if the
mesh.
Delta.

1. Check if the servo is properly 1. Please connect the UVW
The encoder U, V, W
grounded. connector (color green) to
signals are in error.
2. Check if the encoder cable the heat sink of the servo


mesh.
Delta.

1. Check if the servo is properly 1. Please connect the UVW
grounded. connector (color green) to
2. Check if the encoder cable the heat sink of the servo
The internal address
of the encoder is in
error.
mesh.
Delta.
AL030Motor crash error

1. Check if P1-57 is enabled. 1. If it is enabled by mistake,
Motor Crash Error 2. Check if P1-57 is set too small and please set P1-57 to zero.
the time of P1-58 is set too short. 2. According to the actual
torque setting, if the value
is set too small, the alarm
will be triggered by
mistake. However, if the
value is set too big, it will
lose the function of
protection.

AL031Incorrect wiring of the motor power line U, V, W

The wiring of U, V, W Check if U, V, W of the motor is Follow the user manual to
of the motor is incorrect connected or the correctly wire U, V, and W
incorrect connected connection is breakdown. and make sure it is
or the connection is grounded.
breakdown.
AL035Encoder temperature exceeds the protective range

Check if the environment
Encoder temperature Try to reduce operating
temperature is excessive or the
is over 120C. temperature.
motor temperature is over 105C.
AL048Excessive encoder output error

Exam error recording (P4-00 ~ P4-
Encoder error causes Please refer to the corrective
05) to check if encoder error also
abnormal encoder actions of AL011, AL024,
occurs. (AL011, AL024, AL025,
output. AL025 and AL026
AL026)
Check if following conditions occur: Correctly set P1-76 and P1-

The output pulse 46:
P1-76 < Motor speed or
exceeds hardware P1-76 > Motor speed and
tolerance. Motor speed
P1 46 4 19.8 106 Motor speed
60 P1 46 4 19.8 106
60
AL067Encoder temperature warning

Check if the operating temperature is
Encoder temperature Try to reduce operating
excessive or the motor temperature
is over 100C. temperature.
is over 85C.
AL083Servo Drive Outputs Excessive Current

UVW cable is short- Check the configuration of motor Replace by new UVW cable
circuited power cable and connector cable. and avoid the metal
See if the metal wire is exposed or conductor being exposed so
AWG is worn and causes short as to eliminate short-circuit.
circuit of UVW cable.
Wrong motor wiring 1. If applying non-standard power Please refer to the
cable recommended by Delta, description of wiring in
please check if the wiring Chapter 3 and conduct the
sequence of UVW cable is wiring again.
correct.

2. Check if there is any problem of

lack phase when connecting
UVW from servo to motor
(unconnected or wrong
connection)
Analog signal (GND) Check if the GND of analog signal is Please refer to Chapter 3 and
from servo drive is misconnected to other signal. conduct the wiring again.
interfered GND of analog signal cannot
be grounded with other
signals.
AL085Regeneration error

Choose wrong Check the connection of Calculate the value of the
regenerative resistor or regenerative resistor. regenerative resistor again
does not connect to and correctly set the value of
external regenerative P1-52 and P1-53. If issue
resistor persists, please send the
Parameter P1-53 is not Check if parameter P1-53 of Set parameter P1-53 of
set to zero when the regenerative resister is set to zero. regenerative resistor to zero
regenerative resistor is when it is not applying.
not in use.
Wrong parameter Check the setting value of Correctly reset the value of
setting parameter P1-52 and P1-53. P1-52 and P1-53.
AL099DSP firmware upgrade

Upgrade DSP firmware Check if the firmware is upgraded. Firstly set P2-08 to 30. Then
set P2-08 to 28, the alarm
will be cleared when re-
power on.
AL555System failure
DSP processing error N/A If AL555 occurs, do not do
any anything and send the

AL880System failure
DSP processing error N/A If AL880 occurs, do not do
any anything and send the

9.3 Corrective Actions after the Alarm Occurs

AL001 Over current Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm
AL002 Over voltage Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm
AL003 Under voltage The alarm can be cleared after the voltage
returns to normal.
The magnetic field of the The alarm can be cleared after re-power
AL004
motor is abnormal on.
AL005 Regeneration error Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm
AL006 Overload Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm
Excessive speed Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm
AL007
deviation
Abnormal pulse Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm
AL008
command
Excessive deviation of Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm
AL009
position control
The alarm can be cleared after re-power
AL011 Encoder error
on.
AL012 Adjustment error The alarm can be cleared when removing

CN1 wiring and execute auto adjustment.
AL013 Emergency stop The alarm can be cleared automatically

after turning DI.EMGS off
Turn DI.ARST on or Servo Off to clear the
AL014 Reverse limit error alarm. The alarm also can be cleared
when the motor operates backwards.
Turn DI.ARST on or Servo Off to clear the
AL015 Forward limit error alarm. The alarm also can be cleared
when the motor operates backwards.
The temperature of
AL016 Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm
IGBT is abnormal error
If the alarm occurs, then parameter reset
is a must. And re-servo on again. If it
AL017 Abnormal EEPROM
happens during the operation, please
turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm.
AL018 Abnormal signal Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm
error
time out
Main circuit power leak
phase

Early warning for

overload
Encoder initial magnetic The alarm can be cleared after re-power
AL024 field error on.
The internal of the The alarm can be cleared after re-power
AL025
encoder is in error on.
AL026 The encoder is in error
on.
AL027
AL028
AL029
AL030 Motor crash error Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm
Incorrect wiring of the
AL031 motor power line U, V,
on.
W, GND
Encoder temperature
AL035 exceeds the protective
on.
range
Excessive encoder
output error
Encoder temperature The alarm will be cleared when the
AL067
warning temperature back to normal.
Servo drive outputs
excessive current
AL085 Regeneration error Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm
Firstly set P2-08 to 30. Then set it to 28.
AL099 DSP firmware upgrade And the alarm will be cleared after re-
power on.
AL555 DSP processing error N/A
AL880 DSP processing error N/A

Chapter 10 Specifications
10.1 Specifications of Servo Drives (ASDA-B2 Series)
100W 200W 400W 750W 1kW 1.5kW 2kW 3kW

ASDA-B2 Series
01 02 04 07 10 15 20 30
Three-phase
Three-phase: 170 ~ 255 VAC, 50/60 Hz 5 %
PhaseVoltage 170 ~ 255 VAC
Single-phase: 200 ~ 255 VAC, 50/60Hz 5 %
50/60 Hz 5 %
Power
Input Current (3PH) 0.7 1.11 1.86 3.66 4.68 5.9 8.76 9.83
Unit: Arms
Input Current (1PH) 0.9 1.92 3.22 6.78 8.88 10.3 - -
Unit: Arms
Continuous Output Current 0.9 1.55 2.6 5.1 7.3 8.3 13.4 19.4
Unit: Arms
Cooling Method Natural cooling Fan cooling
Encoder Resolution
17-bit (160000 p/rev)
Feedback Resolution
Main Circuit Control SVPWM Control
Control Mode ManualAuto
Regenerative Resistor None Built-in
Line driver: 500 K (low-speed) / 4 Mpps (high-speed)
Max. Input Pulse Frequency
Open collector: 200 Kpps
Position Control Mode
Pulse Type Pulse + Symbol, A phase + B phase, CCW pulse + CW pulse

Command Source External pulse
Smoothing Strategy Low-pass filter
E-gear ratio: N/M time(s). The limit is: (1/50 < N/M < 25600)
E-gear Ratio
N1 ~226-1M1 ~231-1
Torque Limit Parameter settings
Feed Forward Compensation Parameter settings
Voltage Range 0 ~ 10 VDC
Speed Control Mode
Analog
Input
Command 10K
Resistance
Input
Time Constant 2.2 us
Speed Control Range*1 1:5000
Command Source External analog commandRegister
Smoothing Strategy Low-pass and S-curve filter

Chapter 10 Specifications ASDA-B2
100W 200W 400W 750W 1kW 1.5kW 2kW 3kW

ASDA-B2 Series
01 02 04 07 10 15 20 30
Torque Limit Via parameter setting of analog input
Speed Control Mode
Bandwidth Maximum 550 Hz
0.01 % or less at 0 to 100 % load fluctuation
Speed Accuracy*2 0.01 % or less at 10 % power fluctuation
0.01% or less at 0 ~ 50 ambient temperature fluctuation

Voltage Range 0 ~ 10 VDC
Torque Control Mode
Analog
Input
Command 10K
Resistance
Input
Time Constant 2.2 us
Command Source External analog command / Register
Smoothing Strategy Low-pass filter
Speed Limit Via parameter setting or analog input
Monitor signal can be set by parameters
Analog Monitor Output
(Output voltage range: 8V)
Servo on, Fault reset, Gain switch, Pulse clear, Zero clamp,
Command input reverse control, Torque limit, Speed limit, Speed
command selection, Speed / position mode switching, Speed /
Input torque mode switching, Torque / position mode switching,
Emergency stop, Positive/negative limit, Forward/reverse operation
Digital torque limit, Forward / reverse JOG input, E-gear N selection, Pulse
Input/Output input prohibition
A, B, Z Line Driver output
Output Servo on, Servo ready, Zero speed, Target speed reached, Target
position reached, Torque limiting, Servo alarm, Brake control, Early
warning for overload, Servo warning
Over current, Overvoltage, Under voltage, Overheat, Overload,
Excessive speed deviation, Excessive position deviation, Encoder
Protective Funciton
error, Regenerative error, Communication error, Register error,
Short-circuit protection of terminal U, V, W and CN1, CN2, CN3
Communication Interface RS-232RS-485
Indoors (avoid the direct sunlight), no corrosive fog (avoid fume,
Installation Site
flammable gas and dust)
Altitude Altitude 1000 m or lower above sea level
Atmospheric pressure 86 kPa ~ 106 kPa
o o o
0 C ~ 55 C (If operating temperature is above 45 C, forced cooling
Environment
Operating Temperature
will be required)
o o
Storage Temperature -20 C ~ 65 C
Humidity Less than 0 ~ 90% RH (non-condensing)
2
9.80665m/s (1 G) less than 20 Hz,
Vibration 2
5.88m/ s (0.6 G) 20 to 50 Hz
IP Rating IP20
Power System TN system*4

ASDA-B2 Chapter 10 Specifications
IEC/EN 61800-5-1, UL508C

Approvals
Note:
*1 When it is in rated load, the speed ratio is: the minimum speed (smooth operation) /rated speed.
*2 When the command is the rated speed, the velocity correction ratio is: (rotational speed with no
load rotational speed with full load) / rated speed.
*3 TN system: The neutral point of the power system connects to the ground directly. The exposed
metal components connect to the ground via the protective earth conductor.
4 Please refer to section 10.4 for overload features.

10.2 Specifications of Servo Motors (ECMA Series)

Low Inertia Servo Motors
C04 C06 C08 C09 C10 C13
ECMA
01 02 04 S 04 07 07 10 10 20 30
Rated power (kW) 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.75 0.75 1.0 1.0 2.0 3.0
Rated torque (N-m) *1 0.32 0.64 1.27 1.27 2.39 2.38 3.18 3.18 6.37 9.55
Max. torque (N-m) 0.96 1.92 3.82 3.82 7.16 7.14 8.78 9.54 19.11 28.65
Rated speed (r/min) 3000
Max. speed (r/min) 5000 3000 5000 4500
Rated current (A) 0.90 1.55 2.60 2.60 5.10 3.66 4.25 7.30 12.05 17.2
Max. instantaneous
2.70 4.65 7.80 7.74 15.3 11 12.37 21.9 36.15 47.5
current (A)
Max. power pwer second
27.7 22.4 57.6 24.0 50.4 29.6 38.6 38.1 90.6 71.8
(kW/s)
Rotor inertia
2 0.037 0.177 0.277 0.68 1.13 1.93 2.62 2.65 4.45 12.7
( 10-4kg.m )
Mechanical constant (ms) 0.75 0.80 0.53 0.74 0.63 1.72 1.20 0.74 0.61 1.11
Torque constant-KT
0.36 0.41 0.49 0.49 0.47 0.65 0.75 0.44 0.53 0.557
(N-m/A)
Voltage constant-KE
13.6 16.0 17.4 18.5 17.2 24.2 27.5 16.8 19.2 20.98
(mV/(r/min))
Armature resistance
9.30 2.79 1.55 0.93 0.42 1.34 0.897 0.20 0.13 0.0976
(Ohm)
Armature inductance
24.0 12.07 6.71 7.39 3.53 7.55 5.7 1.81 1.50 1.21
(mH)
Electric constant (ms) 2.58 4.30 4.30 7.96 8.36 5.66 6.35 9.30 11.4 12.4
Insulation class Class A (UL), Class B (CE)
Insulation resistance >100M, DC 500V
Insulation strength 1.8k Vac, 1 sec
Weight - without brake
0.5 1.2 1.6 2.1 3.0 2.9 3.8 4.3 6.2 7.8
(kg)
Weight - with brake (kg) 0.8 1.5 2.0 2.9 3.8 3.69 5.5 4.7 7.2 9.2
Radial max. loading (N) 78.4 196 196 245 245 245 245 490 490 490
Axial max. loading (N) 39.2 68 68 98 98 98 98 98 98 98
Max. power per second
25.6 21.3 53.8 22.1 48.4 29.3 37.9 30.4 82.0 65.1
(kW/s) (with brake)
Rotor inertia
2 0.04 0.19 0.30 0.73 1.18 1.95 2.67 3.33 4.95 14.0
( 10-4kg.m ) (with brake)
Mechanical constant (ms)
0.81 0.85 0.57 0.78 0.65 1.74 1.22 0.93 0.66 1.22
(with brake)
Brake holding torque
0.3 1.3 1.3 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 8.0 8.0 10.0
[Nt-m (min)] *2
Brake power consumption
o 7.2 6.5 6.5 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 19.4 19.4 19.0
(at 20 C) [W]

C04 C06 C08 C09 C10 C13

ECMA
01 02 04 S 04 07 07 10 10 20 30
Brake release time
5 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
[ms (Max)]
Brake pull-in time
25 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70
[ms (Max)]
Vibration grade (um) 15
Operating temperature 0 ~ 40 oC
Storage temperature -10 ~ 80 oC
Operating humidity 20% to 90% RH (non-condensing)
Storage humidity 20% to 90% RH (non-condensing)
Vibration capacity 2.5 G
IP65 (when waterproof connectors are used, or when an oil seal is used
IP rating
to be fitted to the rotating shaft (an oil seal model is used))
Approvals
Note:
*1 The rated torque is the continuous permissible torque between 0~40C operating
temperature which is suitable for the following heat sink dimension.
ECMA-__04 / 06 / 08 : 250mm x 250mm x 6mm
ECMA-__10 : 300mm x 300mm x 12mm
ECMA-__13 : 400mm x 400mm x 20mm
ECMA-__18 : 550mm x 550mm x 30mm
Material: Aluminum F40, F60, F80, F100, F130, F180
*2 The built-in brake of the servo motor is for remaining the item in stop status. Do not use it
to decelerate or as the dynamic brake.

Medium / High Inertia Servo Motors

E13 E18 G13
ECMA
05 10 15 20 20 30 35 03 06 09
Rated power (kW) 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.0 3.0 3.8 0.3 0.6 0.9
Rated torque (N-m) *1 2.39 4.77 7.16 9.55 9.55 14.32 16.71 2.86 5.73 8.59
Max. torque (N-m) 7.16 14.32 21.48 28.65 28.65 42.97 50.13 8.59 17.19 21.48
Rated speed (r/min) 2000 1000
Max. speed (r/min) 3000 2000
Rated current (A) 2.9 5.6 8.3 11.01 11.22 16.1 19.2 2.5 4.8 7.5
Max. instantaneous
8.7 16.8 24.81 33.0 33.66 48.3 57.6 7.44 14.49 22.5
current (A)
7.0 27.1 45.9 62.5 26.3 37.3 50.8 10.0 39.0 66.0
(kW/s)
Rotor inertia
2 8.17 8.41 11.18 14.59 34.68 54.95 54.95 8.17 8.41 11.18
( 10-4kg.m )
Mechanical constant
1.91 1.51 1.10 0.96 1.62 1.06 1.08 1.84 1.40 1.06
(ms)
Torque constant-KT
0.83 0.85 0.87 0.87 0.85 0.89 0.87 1.15 1.19 1.15
(N-m/A)
Voltage constant-KE
30.9 31.9 31.8 31.8 31.4 32.0 32 42.5 43.8 41.6
(mV/(r/min))
Armature resistance
0.57 0.47 0.26 0.174 0.119 0.052 0.052 1.06 0.82 0.43
(Ohm)
Armature inductance
7.39 5.99 4.01 2.76 2.84 1.38 1.38 14.29 11.12 6.97
(mH)
Electric constant (ms) 12.96 12.88 15.31 15.86 23.87 26.39 26.39 13.55 13.50 16.06
Insulation resistance >100 M, DC 500 V
Insulation strength 1.8k Vac,1 sec
Weight - without
6.8 7.0 7.5 7.8 13.5 18.5 18.5 6.8 7.0 7.5
brake(kg)
Weight - with brake (kg) 8.2 8.4 8.9 9.2 17.5 22.5 22.5 8.2 8.4 8.9
Radial max. loading (N) 490 490 490 490 1176 1470 490 490 490 490
Axial max. loading (N) 98 98 98 98 490 490 98 98 98 98
6.4 24.9 43.1 59.7 24.1 35.9 48.9 9.2 35.9 62.1
(kW/s) (with brake)
Rotor inertia
-4 2 8.94 9.14 11.90 15.88 37.86 57.06 57.06 8.94 9.14 11.9
( 10 kg.m ) (with brake)
Mechanical constant
2.07 1.64 1.19 1.05 1.77 1.10 1.12 2.0 1.51 1.13
(ms) (with brake)
10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 25.0 25.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
[Nt-m (min)] *2
Brake power
consumption 19.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 20.4 20.4 19.0 19.0 19.0 19.0
o
(at 20 C) [W]

E13 E18 G13

ECMA
05 10 15 20 20 30 35 03 06 09
Brake release time
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
[ms (Max)]
Brake pull-in time
70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70
[ms (Max)]
IP65 (when waterproof connectors are used, or when an oil seal is used
IP rating
to be fitted to the rotating shaft (an oil seal model is used))
Approvals
Note:
ECMA-__04 / 06 / 08 : 250mm x 250mm x 6mm
ECMA-__10 : 300mm x 300mm x 12mm
ECMA-__13 : 400mm x 400mm x 20mm
ECMA-__18 : 550mm x 550mm x 30mm
*2 The built-in brake of the servo motor is for remaining the item in stop status. Do not use it to
decelerate or as the dynamic brake.

Medium-high / High Inertia Servo Motors

F13 F18
ECMA Series
08 30 18 30
Rated power (kW) 0.85 1.3 1.8 3.0
Rated torque (N-m) *1 5.41 8.34 11.48 19.10
Max. torque (N-m) 13.8 23.3 28.7 57.29
Rated speed (r/min) 1500
Max. speed (r/min) 3000
Rated current (A) 7.1 12.6 13 19.4
Max. instantaneous
19.4 38.6 36 58.2
current (A)
21.52 34.78 52.93 66.4
(kW/s)
Rotor inertia
2 13.6 20 24.9 54.95
( 10-4kg.m )
Mechanical constant
2.43 1.62 1.7 1.28
(ms)
Torque constant-KT
0.76 0.66 0.88 0.98
(N-m/A)
Voltage constant-KE
29.2 24.2 32.2 35.0
(mV/(r/min))
Armature resistance
0.38 0.124 0.185 0.077
(Ohm)
Armature inductance
4.77 1.7 2.6 1.27
(mH)
Electric constant (ms) 12.55 13.71 14.05 16.5
Insulation resistance >100 M, DC 500 V
Weight - without brake
8.6 9.4 10.5 18.5
(kg)
Weight - with brake (kg) 10.0 -- -- 22.5
Radial max. loading (N) 490 490 490 1470
Axial max. loading (N) 98 98 98 490
19.78 32.66 50.3 63.9
(kW/s) (with brake)
Rotor inertia
-4 2 14.8 21.3 26.2 57.06
( 10 kg.m ) (with brake)
Mechanical constant
2.65 1.73 1.79 1.33
(ms) (with brake)
10.0 10.0 10.0 25.0
[Nt-m (min)] *2
Brake power
consumption 19.0 19.0 19.0 20.4
o
(at 20 C) [W]

F13 F18
ECMA
08 13 18 08
Brake release time
10 10 10 10
[ms (Max)]
Brake pull-in time
70 70 70 70
[ms (Max)]
IP65 (when waterproof connectors
are used, or when an oil seal is used
IP rating
to be fitted to the rotating shaft (an
oil seal model is used))
Approvals*3
Note:
ECMA-__04 / 06 / 08 : 250mm x 250mm x 6mm
ECMA-__10 : 300mm x 300mm x 12mm
ECMA-__13 : 400mm x 400mm x 20mm
ECMA-__18 : 550mm x 550mm x 30mm
*3 The application of UL safety compliance for ECMA-F11308, ECMA-F11313, ECMA-F11318
is under processing.
4 If desire to reach the max. torque limit of motor 250%, it is suggested to use the servo drive
with higher watt.

High Inertia Series

C06 C08
ECMA
04H 07H
Rated power (kW) 0.4 0.75
Rated torque (N-m)*1 1.27 2.39
Max. torque (N-m) 3.82 7.16
Rated speed (r/min) 3000 3000
Max. speed (r/min) 5000 5000
Rated current (A) 2.6 5.1
Max. instantaneous current (A) 7.8 15.3
Max. power per second (kW/s) 21.7 19.63
Rotor inertia ( 10-4kg.m )

2 0.743 2.91
Mechanical constant (ms) 1.42 1.6
Torque constant KT(N-m/A) 0.49 0.47

Voltage constant KE 17.4 17.2
(mV/(r/min))
Armature resistance (Ohm) 1.55 0.42
Armature inductance (mH) 6.71 3.53
Electric constant (ms) 4.3 8.36
Insulation resistance 100M, DC 500V

Weight without brake (kg) 1.8 3.4
Weight with brake (kg) 2.2 3.9
Radial max. loading (N) 196 245
Axial max. loading (N) 68 98
Max. power per second (kW/s) 21.48 19.3
(with brake)
2
Rotor inertia ( 10-4kg.m ) 0.751 2.96
(with brake)
Mechanical constant (ms) 1.43 1.62
(with brake)
Brake holding torque 1.3 1.3
[Nt-m (min)] *2
Brake power consumption (at 6.5 6.5
20C) [W]
Brake release time 10 10
[ms (Max)]
Brake pull-in time
70 70
[ms (Max)]
Vibration grade (m) 15

C06 C08
ECMA
04H 07H
Operating temperature (C) 0 ~ 40
Storage temperature (C) -10 ~ 80
Operating humidity 20 ~ 90%RH (non-condensing)
Storage humidity 20 ~ 90%RH (non-condensing)
Vibration capacity 2.5G
IP65 (use the waterproof connector and
IP Rating
shaft seal installation (or oil seal)
Approvals
Note:
ECMA-__04 / 06 / 08 : 250mm x 250mm x 6mm
ECMA-__10 : 300mm x 300mm x 12mm
ECMA-__13 : 400mm x 400mm x 20mm
ECMA-__18 : 550mm x 550mm x 30mm
3 If desire to reach the max. torque limit of motor 250%, it is suggested to use the servo drive
with higher watt.

10.3 Torque Features (T-N Curves)
Torque(N-m)
1.92
(300%)
Acceleration/
Deceleration
area
0.64
(100%)
0.38 Continuous
area
(60%)
Speed(r/min)
3000 5000
ECMA-C10602S
Torque
(N-m)
7.16
(300%)
Acceleration /
Deceleration
area
2.39
(100%)
1.43 Continuous
(60%) area
Speed
3000 5000 (r/min)
ECMA-C10807S, ECMA-C10807H
Torque (N-m)
28.65
(300%)
Acceleration/
Deceleration
area
9.55
(100%)
6.40 Continuous
(67%) area
Speed (r/min)
3000 4500
ECMA-C113304

Torque (N-m)
50.13
(300%)
Acceleration/
Deceleration
area
16.71
(100%)
11.20 Continuous
(67%) area
Speed (r/min)
2000 3000
ECMA-E11835S
Torque (N-m)
28.7
(250%)
Acceleration /
Deceleration
11.48 area
(100%)
5.74 Continuous
(50%) area
Speed (r/min)
1500 2200 3000
ECMA-F11318S

10.4 Overload Features
Definition of overload protection

The overload protection is to prevent the motor in overheat status.
Cause of overload
1) When the motor operates over the rated torque, the operation time is too long
2) The inertia ratio is set too big and frequently accelerate / decelerate
3) Connection error between the power cable and encoder wiring
4) Servo gain setting error and cause resonance of the motor
5) The motor with brake operates without releasing the brake
The graph of load and operating time
Low Inertia Series (ECMA C, CM Series)

Medium and Medium-High Inertia Series (ECMA E, F Series)
High Inertia Series (ECMA G, GM Series)

10.5 Dimensions of Servo Drives
ASD-B2-0121; ASD-B2-0221; ASD-B2-0421; ASD-B2L-0421 (100 W ~ 400 W)

152(5.98)
162(6.37)
WEIGHT
1.07 (2.36)
NOTE
1) Dimensions are in millimeters (inches); Weights are in kilograms (kg) and (pounds (lbs)).
2) Dimensions and weights of the servo drive may be revised without prior notice.

ASD-B2-0721; ASD-B2L-0721 (750 W)
WEIGHT
1.54 (3.40)
NOTE

ASD-B2-1021; ASD-B2L-1021; ASD-B2-1521 (1 kW ~ 1.5 kW)
WEIGHT
1.72 (3.79)
NOTE

ASD-B2-2023; ASD-B2-3023 (2 kW ~ 3 kW)

113.7(4.47) 70(2.76) 198.2(7.8)
6(0.23)
5.5(0.21) 102(4.01)
GROUNDING
SCREW: M40.7
MOUNTING SCREW TORQUE:14(kgf-cm)
WEIGHT
2.67 (5.88)
NOTE

10.6 Dimensions of Servo Motors
Motor Frame Size: 86 mm and below Models (Units: mm)

30050
LBh7
Sh6
LC
Model C0401S C0602S C0604S C0604H

LC 40 60 60 60
LZ 4.5 5.5 5.5 5.5
LA 46 70 70 70
S 8(00.009) 14( 00.011) 14( 00.011) 14( 00.011)
LB 30 ( 00.021) 50( 00.025) 50( 00.025) 50( 00.025)
LL (without brake) 100.6 105.5 130.7 145.8
LL (with brake) 136.6 141.6 166.8 176.37
LS 20 27 27 27
LR 25 30 30 30
LE 2.5 3 3 3
LG 5 7.5 7.5 7.5
LW 16 20 20 20
RH 6.2 11 11 11
WK 3 5 5 5
W 3 5 5 5
T 3 5 5 5
M3 M4 M4 M4
TP
Depth 8 Depth 15 Depth 15 Depth 15
NOTE
1) Dimensions are in millimeters.

2) Dimensions and weights of the servo motor may be revised without prior notice.
3) The boxes () in the model names represent shaft end/brake or the number of oil seal.
4) Please refer to Chapter 1 for the boxes () in the model names (which represents encoder
type).

Motor Frame Size: 86 mm and below Models (Units: mm)

30050
LBh7
Sh6
LC
Model C08047 C0804S C0807H C0907S C0910S
LC 80 80 80 86 86
LZ 6.6 6.6 6.6 6.6 6.6
LA 90 90 90 100 100
S 14( 00.011) 19 ( 00.013 ) 19 ( 00.013 ) 16( 00.011) 16( 00.011)
LB 70( 00.030 ) 70( 00.030 ) 70( 00.030 ) 80( 00.030 ) 80( 00.030 )
LL (without brake) 112.3 138.3 151.1 130.2 153.2
LL (with brake) 152.8 178 189 161.3 184.3
LS 27 32 32 30 30
LR 30 35 35 35 35
LE 3 3 3 3 3
LG 8 8 8 8 8
LW 20 25 25 20 20
RH 11 15.5 15.5 13 13
WK 5 6 6 5 5
W 5 6 6 5 5
T 5 6 6 5 5
M4 M6 M6 M5 M5
TP
Depth 15 Depth 20 Depth 20 Depth 15 Depth 15
NOTE

type).

Motor Frame Size: 100 mm ~ 130 mm Models (Units: mm)
C1330 E1305 E1315

Model C1010 S C1020 S E1310 S E1320 S
4 S S
LC 100 100 130 130 130 130 130
LZ 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
LA 115 115 145 145 145 145 145
22(00.013) 22(00.013) 22( 00.013 ) 22(00.013 ) 22(00.013)
0
S 24(0.013) 22(00.013)
95 ( 00.035 ) 95(00.035) 110(00.035) 110(00.035) 110(00.035) 110(00.035)

0
LB 110(0.035)
LL
153.3 199 187.5 147.5 147.5 167.5 187.5
(without brake)
LL
192.5 226 216.0 183.5 183.5 202 216
(with brake)
LS 37 37 47 47 47 47 47
LR 45 45 55 55 55 55 55
LE 5 5 6 6 6 6 6
LG 12 12 11.5 11.5 11.5 11.5 11.5
LW 32 32 36 36 36 36 36
RH 18 18 20 18 18 18 18
WK 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
W 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
T 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
M6 M6 M6 M6 M6 M6 M6
TP
Depth 20 Depth 20 Depth 20 Depth 20 Depth 20 Depth 20 Depth 20
NOTE

type).

Motor Frame Size: 100 mm ~ 130 mm Models (Units: mm)
Model F1308 S F1313 S F1318 S G1303 S G1306 S G1309 S

LC 130 130 130 130 130 130
LZ 9 9 9 9 9 9
LA 145 145 145 145 145 145
S 22(00.013) 22(00.013 ) 22(00.013 ) 22(00.013) 22(00.013 ) 22(00.013)
LB 110(00.035 ) 110(00.035 ) 110(00.035 ) 110(00.035) 110(00.035 ) 110(00.035 )
LL
152.5 187.5 202 147.5 147.5 163.5
(without brake)
LL
181 -- -- 183.5 183.5 198
(with brake)
LS 47 47 47 47 47 47
LR 55 55 55 55 55 55
LE 6 6 6 6 6 6
LG 11.5 11.5 11.5 11.5 11.5 11.5
LW 36 36 36 36 36 36
RH 18 18 18 18 18 18
WK 8 8 8 8 8 8
W 8 8 8 8 8 8
T 7 7 7 7 7 7
M6 M6 M6 M6 M6 M6
TP
Depth 20 Depth 20 Depth 20 Depth 20 Depth 20 Depth 20
NOTE

type).

Motor Frame Size: 180 mm Models (Units: mm)
Model E1820S E1830S E1835 S F1830S

LC 180 180 180 180
LZ 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5
LA 200 200 200 200
S 35( 00.016) 35( 00.016) 35(00.016) 35( 00.016)
LB 114.3( 00.035) 114.3( 00.035) 114 .3(00.035 ) 114.3( 00.035)
LL (without brake) 169 202.1 202.1 202.1
LL (with brake) 203.1 235.3 235.3 235.3
LS 73 73 73 73
LR 79 79 79 79
LE 4 4 4 4
LG 20 20 20 20
LW 63 63 63 63
RH 30 30 30 30
WK 10 10 10 10
W 10 10 10 10
T 8 8 8 8
M12 M12 M12 M12
TP
Depth 25 Depth 25 Depth 25 Depth 25
NOTE

3) The boxes () in the model names are for optional configurations. (Please refer to section 1.2
for model explanation.)
type).

Appendix A Accessories
Power Connectors
Delta Part Number: ASDBCAPW0000
Title Part No. Manufacturer

Housing C4201H00-2*2PA JOWLE
Terminal C4201TOP-2 JOWLE
Delta Part Number:ASDBCAPW0100

Delta Part Number: ASD-CAPW1000
Delta Part Number: ASD-CAPW2000
RevisionDecember 2014 A-1

Appendix A Accessories ASDA-B2
Power Cables
Delta Part Number: ASDBCAPW0203 / 0205

L
Title Part No.
mm inch
1 ASDBCAPW0203 3000 50 118 2
2 ASDBCAPW0205 5000 50 197 2

L
Title Part No.
mm inch
1 ASDBCAPW0303 3000 50 118 2
2 ASDBCAPW0305 5000 50 197 2
A-2 Revision December 2014

ASDA-B2 Appendix A Accessories

YF3.5-3SG
3106A-20-18S
L
L
Title Part No. Straight
mm inch
1 ASDBCAPW1203 3106A-20-18S 3000 50 118 2
2 ASDBCAPW1205 3106A-20-18S 5000 50 197 2
YF3.5-3SG
3106A-20-18S
L
L
mm inch
1 ASDBCAPW1303 3106A-20-18S 3000 50 118 2
2 ASDBCAPW1305 3106A-20-18S 5000 50 197 2
Delta Part Number: ASD-CAPW2203 / 2205
L
mm inch
1 ASD-CAPW2203 3106A-24-11S 3000 50 118 2
2 ASD-CAPW2205 3106A-24-11S 5000 50 197 2
Revision December 2014 A-3

Delta Part Number: ASD-CAPW2303 / 2305
L
mm inch
1 ASD-CAPW2303 3106A-24-11S 3000 50 118 2
2 ASD-CAPW2305 3106A-24-11S 5000 50 197 2
Encoder Connectors
Delta Part Number: ASDBCAEN0000

Housing AMP (1-172161-9) AMP
Terminal AMP (170359-3) AMP
CLAMP DELTA (34703237XX) DELTA
Delta Part Number: ASDBCAEN1000

Encoder Cables
Delta Part Number: ASDBCAEN0003 / 0005

Housing AMP (1-172161-9) AMP
Terminal AMP (170359-3) AMP
CLAMP DELTA (34703237XX) DELTA
L
Title Part No.
mm inch
1 ASDBCAEN0003 3000 50 118 2
2 ASDBCAEN0005 5000 50 197 2
Delta Part Number: ASDBCAEN1003 / 1005
L
mm inch
1 ASDBCAEN1003 3106A-20-29S 3000 50 118 2
2 ASDBCAEN1005 3106A-20-29S 5000 50 197 2

I/O Signal Connector (CN1)

Delta Part Number: ASDBCNDS0044
Delta Part Number: ASD-CNDS0015
Communication Cable between Servo Drive and Computer

Delta Part Number: ASD-CNUS0A08
80.1
22.5
21.2
1.8
Unit: mm
Title Part No. : ASD-CNUS0A08

3000 100 mm
cable L
118 4 inch
RJ connector RJ-45
connector
USB connector A-type (USB V2.0)

Voltage Output Cable (Analog Signal)

Delta Part Number: --
Delta Serial Number: 3864471800
1
2
3
205

Housing A2004H00-3P JWT
Terminal A2004TOP-2 JWT
RS-485 Connector
Delta Part Number: ASD-CNIE0B06
Terminal Block Module

Delta Part Number: ASD-MDDS4444

Servo Drive, Servo Motor and Accessories Combinations
100W Servo Drive and 100W Low Inertia Servo Motor

Servo Drive ASD-B2-0121-B
Low inertia Servo Motor ECMA-C0401S
Motor Power Cable (Without Brake) ASDBCAPW020X
Power Connector (Without Brake) ASDBCAPW0000
Motor Power Cable (With Brake) ASDBCAPW030X
Power Connector (With Brake) ASDBCAPW0100
Encoder Cable ASDBCAEN000X
Encoder Connector ASDBCAEN0000
(X=3 indicates that the cable length is 3m; X=5 indicates that the cable length is 5m)
ECMA-C0604S
Low inertia Servo Motor ECMA-C08047
ECMA-CM0604PS

400W Servo Drive and 400W High Inertia Servo Motor

Low inertia Servo Motor ECMA-C0604H
Power Cable (With Brake) ASDBCAPW030X
400W Servo Drive and 500W Medium Inertia Servo Motor
Medium inertia Servo Motor ECMA-E1305S
Power Connector ASD-CAPW1000
Increment Encoder Cable ASDBCAEN100X
High inertia Servo Motor ECMA-G1303S


ECMA-G1306S
High inertia Servo Motor
ECMA-GM1306PS
ECMA-C0807S
ECMA-CM0807PS
Low inertia Servo Motor ECMA-C0807H
Power Connector ASDBCAEN000X
Encoder Cable ASDBCAEN0000
Encoder Connector ASDBCAPW020X

1kW Servo Drive and 850W Low Inertia Servo Motor

Low inertia Servo Motor ECMA-F1308S
1kW Servo Drive and 1kW Low Inertia Servo Motor
Increment Encoder Cable ASDBCAEN000X

1kW Servo Drive and 1kW Medium Inertia Servo Motor

Medium inertia Servo Motor ECMA-C1310S
1kW Servo Drive and 900W High Inertia Servo Motor
ECMA-G1309S
High Inertia Servo Motor
ECMA-GM1309PS
1.5kW Servo Drive and 1.5kW Medium Inertia Servo Motor
Medium Inertia Servo Motor ECMA-E1315S


Low Inertia Servo Motor ECMA-C1020S
Motor Power Cable (Without Brake) ASD-CAPW220X
Motor Power Cable (With Brake) ASD-CAPW230X
2kW Servo Drive and 1.3kW Medium High Inertia Servo Motor
Medium High Inertia Servo Motor ECMA-F11313S

2kW Servo Drive and 1.8kW Medium High Inertia Servo Motor
Low Inertia Servo Motor ECMA-C13304
3kW Servo Drive and 3.5kW Medium Inertia Servo Motor

3kW Servo Drive and 3kW Medium/High Inertia Servo Motor

Other Accessories (for ASDA-B2 series all models)

Description Delta Part Number
Communication Cable between Servo
ASD-CARS0003
Drive and Computer
Regenerative Resistor 400W 100 BR400W040
Regenerative Resistor 1kW 1000 BR1K0W020
NOTE
1) () at the ends of the servo drive model names are for optional configurations. For the
actual model name, please refer to the ordering information of the actual purchased
product.
2) The boxes () in the model names are for encoder resolution types. Please refer to
Chapter 1 for further information.
3) () in the servo motor model names represents brake or keyway / oil seal.


Appendix B Maintenance and
Inspection
Basic Inspection
Item Content
Periodically check if the screws of the servo drive, the connection
between the motor shaft and the mechanical system as well as
the connection of terminal block and mechanical system are
securely tightened.
The gap of the control chamber and the installation of the cooling
fan should free from oil, water or metallic particles. Also, the
General inspection servo drive shall free from the cutting power of the power drill.
If the control chamber is installed in the site which contains
harmful gas or full of dust, please be ensured the servo drive is
free from the harmful gas and dust.
When making encoder cable or wire rods, please be ensured the
wiring is correct. Otherwise, the motor may have sudden
unintended acceleration or be burned.
To avoid the electric shock, the ground terminal of the servo drive
should firmly connect to the ground terminal of the control
chamber. If the wiring is needed, wait at least 10 minutes after
disconnecting the drive from the main supply power, or discharge
electricity by discharge device.
The splicing parts of the wiring terminal should be isolated.
Make sure the wiring is correct so as to avoid the damage or any
abnormity.
Inspection before
Check if the electric conductivity objects including sheetmetal
operation (such as screws) or inflammable objects are not inside the servo
(has not applied to drive.
the power yet)
Check if the control switch is in OFF status.
Do not place the servo drive of external regenerative resistor on
inflammable objects.
To avoid the electromagnetic brake losing efficacy, please check
if stop function and circuit break function can work normally.
If the peripheral devices are interfered by the electronic
instruments, please reduce electromagnetic interference with
devices.
Revision December 2014 B-1

Appendix B Maintenance and Inspection ASDA-B2
Please make sure the external voltage level of the servo drive is
correct.
The encoder cable should avoid excessive stress. When the
motor is running, please be ensured the cable is not frayed or
over extended.
Please contact with Delta if there is any vibration of the servo
Inspection before motor or unusual noise during the operation.
running the servo
Make sure the setting of the parameters is correct. Different
drive machinery has different characteristic, please adjust the
(has already applied parameter according to the characteristic of each machinery.
to the power) Please reset the parameter when the servo drive is in the status
of SERVO OFF, or it may cause malfunction.
When the relay is operating, make sure it can work properly.
Check if the power indicator and LED display works normally.
Maintenance
Please use and store the product in a proper site.
Periodically clean the surface of the servo drive and servo motor so as to avoid the
dust and dirt.
Do not disassemble any mechanical part when in maintenance.
Periodically clean the ventilation ports of the servo drive and do not use the product in
a high-temperature site for a long time so as to avoid the malfunction.
The lifetime of machinery parts

DC Bus Capacitor
DC Bus Capacitor will be deteriorated by the affection of ripple current. Its lifetime is
determined by the surrounding temperature and operating conditions. If it is operating
in an air-conditioned site, its lifetime can up to 10 years.
Relay
The contact of switching power supply will wear and leads to poor contact. The
lifetime of relay is influenced by the power supply capacity; thus, the accumulative
time of switching power supply is about 100,000 times.
Cooling Fan
In continuous operation, the lifetime of the cooling fan is 2 to 3 years. However, if
there is any unusual noise or vibration during inspection, place a new one is a must.
B-2 Revision December 2014

ASDA-B2 Appendix B Maintenance and Inspection
Life of Replacement Components
Smooth capacitor
The characteristics of smooth capacitor would be deteriorated by ripple current

affection. The life of smooth capacitor varies according to ambient temperature and
operating conditions. The common guaranteed life of smooth capacitor is ten years
when it is properly used in normal air-conditioned environment.
Relay
The contacts will wear and result in malfunction due to switching current. The life of
relay varies according to power supply capacity. Therefore, the common guaranteed
life of relay is cumulative 100,000 times of power on and power off.
Cooling fan
The cooling fan life is limited and should be changed periodically. The cooling fan will
reach the end of its life in 2~3 years when it is in continuous operation. However, it
also must be replaced if the cooling fan is vibrating or there are unusual noises.
Revision December 2014 B-3

Appendix B Maintenance and Inspection ASDA-B2
B-4 Revision December 2014

Delta Ia-Asd B2 Um en 20141217

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Delta Ia-Asd B2 Um en 20141217

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Delta Ia-Asd B2 Um en 20141217

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Version: V2.

Installation and inspection of servo drive and servo motor

This manual addresses personnel with the following qualifications:

Revision December 2014 i

ii Revision December 2014

ASDA-B2 is applicable on industrial application and is suggested to be installed in the

The symbol of danger, warning and stop represent:

It indicates the potential hazards. It is possible to cause severe injury or fatal

It indicates the potential hazards. It is possible to cause minor injury or lead to

It indicates the absolute prohibited activity. It is possible to damage the product or

Revision December 2014 iii

During the operation, it is prohibited to touch any rotating motor parts. Or it is

iv Revision December 2014

Terminal Wiring of the Main Circuit

If there is any difference of each version, please refer to DELTAs website

Revision December 2014 v

(This page is intentionally left blank.)

vi Revision December 2014

Chapter 1 Installation and Model Explanation ...................................................... 1-1

1.1 Inspection ........................................................................................................ 1-1

1.2 Product Model ................................................................................................. 1-2

1.2.1 Nameplate Information ........................................................................... 1-2

1.2.2 Model Explanation .................................................................................. 1-3

1.3 Servo Drive and Corresponding Servo Motor .................................................. 1-5

1.4 Servo Drive Features ...................................................................................... 1-7

1.5 Control Modes of Servo Drive ......................................................................... 1-8

Chapter 2 Installation .............................................................................................. 2-1

2.1 Notes ............................................................................................................... 2-1

2.2 Ambient Conditions of Storage ........................................................................ 2-1

2.3 Ambient Conditions of Installation ................................................................... 2-2

2.4 Installation Direction and Space ...................................................................... 2-3

2.5 Specification of Circuit Breaker and Fuse ....................................................... 2-5

2.6 EMI Filter Selection ......................................................................................... 2-6

2.7 Selection of Regenerative Resistor ................................................................. 2-8

Chapter 3 Wiring ...................................................................................................... 3-1

3.1 Connections .................................................................................................... 3-1

3.1.1 Connecting to Peripheral Devices .......................................................... 3-1

3.1.2 Servo Drive Connectors and Terminals .................................................. 3-2

Revision December 2014 v

3.1.3 Wiring Method ........................................................................................ 3-4

3.1.4 Specification of Motor Power Cable ....................................................... 3-6

3.1.5 Specification of Encoder Connector ....................................................... 3-8

3.1.6 Selection of Wiring Rod .......................................................................... 3-11

3.2 Basic Wiring .................................................................................................... 3-13

3.2.1 200 W (included) and Models below ...................................................... 3-13

3.2.2 400 W ~ 750 W Models .......................................................................... 3-14

3.2.3 1 kW ~ 3 kW Models .............................................................................. 3-15

3.3 I / O Signal (CN1) Connection ......................................................................... 3-16

3.3.1 I/O Signal (CN1) Connector Terminal Layout ......................................... 3-16

3.3.2 Signals Explanation of Connector CN1 .................................................. 3-18

3.3.3 Wiring Diagrams (CN1) .......................................................................... 3-26

3.3.4 DI and DO Signal Specified by Users ..................................................... 3-33

3.4 CN2 Connector .............................................................................................. 3-34

3.5 Wiring of CN3 Connector ................................................................................ 3-36

3.6 Analog Monitor Output Connector - CN5 ......................................................... 3-37

3.7 Standard Connection Example ........................................................................ 3-38

3.7.1 Position (PT) Control Mode .................................................................... 3-38

3.7.2 Speed Control Mode .............................................................................. 3-39